JP6536337B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are provided with control means such as a CPU, read-only storage means such as a ROM, and read / write storage means such as a RAM. The control means executes processing in accordance with the program read from the read only storage means while writing information to the read / write storage means and reading information from the storage means. When executing this process, information from a sensor or the like is input to the control means, and information from the control means is output to the electric actuator, the light emitting element, or the like. It is also known that control means, read-only storage means, read / write storage means, etc. are integrated into one chip.

With regard to the slot machine, specifically, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are betted, a lottery process of winning is performed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process of the winning combination is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and the control means is operated when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel. At this time, the rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player. For example, game media are provided as the provision of the benefit (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-045989, A

Here, various controls need to be suitably performed in the gaming machine as illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The above problems are not limited to slot machines, but also apply to gaming machines that use gaming balls as gaming media, for example.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing various controls .

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 performs control of a plurality of types of processing, and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit when processing is executed;
Predetermined storage means for storing a program necessary for executing processing in the control means;
Equipped with
The control means
First predetermined process execution means for executing a first predetermined process of the plurality of types of processes;
Second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process of the plurality of types of processes;
Information stored in the internal storage means when starting the second predetermined process without evacuating the information stored in the internal storage means when the first predetermined process is started Save execution means for saving the data into the save storage means;
Return execution means for returning the information saved in the save storage means to the internal storage means when or after completing the second predetermined process;
Equipped with
The first predetermined process is executed when the interrupt process is started based on the establishment of the interrupt condition,
When starting the second predetermined process from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited in the first predetermined process before the second predetermined process is started, When ending the second predetermined process and returning to the first predetermined process, the execution of the interrupt process is permitted in the returned first predetermined process, and the execution of the interrupt process is permitted in the second predetermined process. It is not possible to
In the first predetermined process, a process for advancing a game is executed,
In the second predetermined process, a process different from the process for advancing the game is executed,
The second predetermined process includes a management process for performing a predetermined management, and a notification process for performing a notice corresponding to the result of the management process.
The save storage means includes a first save storage means provided corresponding to the first predetermined process, and a second save storage means provided corresponding to the second predetermined process,
The evacuation execution means is
When the second predetermined process is started from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, the information of the internal storage means is stored in the first predetermined process before the second predetermined process is started. A means for evacuating in the evacuation storage means;
A unit that saves information of the internal storage unit to the second save storage unit in a situation where the second predetermined process is being performed;
Equipped with
The program for executing the second predetermined process is stored in the area of the address group distinguished from the address group of the area in which the program for executing the first predetermined process is stored in the predetermined storage means. Yes,
A first process and a second process are set as the second predetermined process,
When starting the first process from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, the first save storage of the information of the internal storage means in the first predetermined process before starting the first process The data is saved to the means, and the information saved in the first save storage means is returned to the internal storage means when or after the first process is completed.
When starting the first process from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited in the first predetermined process before the first process is started, and the first process is inhibited. When the process is ended and the process is returned to the first predetermined process, the execution of the interrupt process is permitted in the returned first predetermined process, and the execution of the interrupt process is not permitted in the first process. ,
When starting the second process from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, the first save storage of the information of the internal storage means in the first predetermined process before starting the second process The data is saved to the means, and when the second process is finished or after it is finished, the information saved in the first save storage means is returned to the internal storage means.
When starting the second process from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited in the first predetermined process before starting the second process, and the second process is started. When ending the process and returning to the first predetermined process, execution of the interrupt process is permitted in the restored first predetermined process, and execution of the interrupt process is not permitted in the second process. It is characterized by

According to the present invention, various controls can be suitably performed .

FIG. 16 is a front view of the slot machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view of a slot machine showing the state where the front door was opened. It is an assembly perspective view of a left reel. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design and combination line which can be visually recognized from a display window part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is an electric block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the start waiting process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by main side MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal modes. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning condition established when the normal mode lottery table is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st RT mode lottery table. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning condition established when the first RT mode lottery table is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT modes. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning condition established when the second RT mode lottery table is selected. (A) It is a connection diagram which shows the drive system of a stepping motor, (b) is a figure which shows the drive characteristic of a stepping motor. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of phase excitation. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for acceleration, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for stop. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between each step number and phase excitation when it is recognized that the symbol to which 26 steps are allocated exists in a predetermined position, and (b) 24 steps It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between each step number and phase excitation in, when it recognizes that the symbol to which it is allocated exists in a predetermined position. It is an explanatory view for explaining the number of steps assigned to each symbol of each reel. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stepping motor control processing of the left reel performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the number monitoring process of steps performed by main side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the sliding table of the left reel at the time of winning with IV = 4, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the sliding table of the middle reel at the time of winning with IV = 4, (C) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the sliding table of the right reel at the time of winning with IV = 4. It is a flowchart which shows the prize determination processing performed by main side MPU. (A)-(j) It is a time chart which shows the setting aspect of the invalid period of conventional stop operation. It is a flowchart which shows the effective operation determination processing performed by main side MPU. (A)-(j) It is a time chart which shows the execution mode of stop control of the reel by performing effective operation determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows effective operation judging processing in the 1st other form. (A)-(j) It is a time chart which shows the execution aspect of stop control of the reel by performing the effective operation determination process in 1st another form. It is a flow chart which shows effective operation judging processing in the 2nd other form. It is a flow chart which shows effective operation judging processing in the 3rd other form. It is a flowchart which shows the response | compatibility process at the time of the game end performed by main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows ART preparation state processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ART state process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows ART end branch processing performed by main side MPU. (A) It is a front view of a special display part, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a special display part. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the alerting | reporting content in an image display apparatus, and the display content in a special display part. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting control processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting control processing corresponding to the branch performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for alerting | reporting performed by production side MPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that alerting | reporting of a relationship with a winning combination is performed in each of a special display part and an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting control processing of the branch corresponding to another form. (A) to (e) are explanatory diagrams for describing the contents of the ending image displayed on the image display device, and (f) an explanatory diagram for describing the contents of the image data stored in the character ROM. It is. It is a flowchart which shows the process for BB performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ending display control processing performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the winning probability setting process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for describing a state in which the type of the ending base image is changed. It is a flowchart which shows the winning probability setting process in a 1st other form. It is a flowchart which shows the winning probability setting process in a 2nd another form. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the kind of ending base image is changed in a 2nd other form. It is a flowchart which shows the winning probability setting process in a 3rd another form. It is a flowchart which shows the winning probability setting process in a 4th other form. It is an explanatory view for explaining the 1st order and the 2nd order in the 4th other form. It is a flowchart which shows the process for BB in 4th another form. It is an explanatory view for explaining a setting mode of a program and data in the main side ROM. It is an explanatory view for explaining a setting mode of each area in the main side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st non-specific control processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd non-specific control processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd non-specific control processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the start waiting process in a 1st other form. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st non-specific control processing in the 1st other form. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the start waiting process in 2nd another form, It is a flowchart which shows the reel control process in (b) 2nd another form. It is a flowchart which shows the calling process of non-specific control in a 2nd other form. It is a flowchart which shows the calling process of non-specific control in a 3rd other form. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st non-specific control processing in the 3rd modification.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a slot machine which is a type of gaming machine will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape opened forward as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

  A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so that the internal space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed with the left side portion as a pivot. The front door 12 is locked so as not to be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back of the front door 12. The locked state is released by an unlocking operation of the key cylinder 14 with a predetermined key.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 for notifying the player of the game state is provided on the upper side of the central portion of the front door 12. In the game panel 20, three vertically long display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R are formed in a line. The display windows 21L, 21M, 21R are made of a transparent or semi-transparent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate, and the reel unit 31 is attached to the top of the partition plate. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M and a right reel 32R which are respectively formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotational axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are disposed on the same axis extending substantially in the horizontal direction, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are in one-to-one correspondence with the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. In addition, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surface of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is projected as if it were moving from the top to the bottom through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

  Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to the stepping motor 33, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually, that is, independently and independently, by driving the stepping motor 33. It has become. Since each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has the same configuration, the left reel 32L will be described as an example based on FIG. 3 here. FIG. 3 is an assembled perspective view of the left reel 32L.

  The left reel 32L is provided with a cylindrical frame member 34 forming a cylindrical cage, and a belt-like belt (not shown in FIG. 3) endlessly wound on the outer peripheral surface thereof. And it is stuck to the cylindrical frame member 34 via a pair of seal parts formed along the long sides of the belt so as to maintain the wound state. A large number of symbols as identification information are printed at equal intervals on the outer peripheral surface of the belt. The central portion of the cylindrical frame member 34 is attached to the drive shaft of the stepping motor 33. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the stepping motor 33 is rotated, the cylindrical skeleton member 34 is rotated about the drive shaft, and the left reel 32L is rotated.

  The stepping motor 33 is screwed to the side surface of the motor plate 35 disposed in the upright state in the reel unit 31. The motor plate 35 is provided with a reel index sensor 36 in which the light emitting element 36 a and the light receiving element 36 b are held at a predetermined interval. On the other hand, a sensor cut bun 37 extending in the radial direction is screwed to the cylindrical frame member 34. The tip end portion 37a of the sensor cut bun 37 is bent at substantially a right angle and aligned so as to be able to pass between the two elements 36a and 36b of the reel index sensor 36. Then, every time the left reel 32L makes one rotation, the reel index sensor 36 detects the passage of the front end portion 37a of the sensor cut bun 37, and a detection signal is output to the main control device 70 described later each time. Therefore, main controller 70 can check and correct the angular position of left reel 32L every one rotation based on this detection signal.

  The stepping motor 33 is set to rotate one step by advancing 504 steps by giving an excitation signal of, for example, 504 pulses, and the rotational position of the stepping motor 33, that is, the rotational position of the left reel 32L is controlled by the number of steps. Be done. On each belt of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of, specifically, 20 symbols are drawn in the direction of the long side (surrounding direction). In this case, although the details will be described later, it takes 24 steps (i.e. 24 pulses) or 26 steps (i.e. 26 pulses) to switch from one symbol to a next symbol at a predetermined position. Then, the output of the 24 steps is performed eight times and the output of the 26 steps is performed 12 times, which results in 504 steps corresponding to one rotation. Main controller 70 recognizes which symbol is visible from display window 21L by the number of steps (that is, the number of pulses) from the time when the detection signal of reel index sensor 36 is output, or Control can be performed to make an arbitrary symbol visible from the display window 21L.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the lower left side of the game panel 20, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. When the start lever 41 is operated while medals are betted, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate all at once.

  On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43 and 44 are provided which are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M and 32R. The stop buttons 42, 43 and 44 are disposed immediately below the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M and 32R to be stopped. The respective stop buttons 42, 43 and 44 can be stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed after the left reel 32L starts to rotate.

  The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, and medals are awarded. And until the execution of various processes such as management of the game state is completed, corresponds to one game (game time).

  On the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. The medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 is guided to the hopper device 53 if the acceptance is permitted by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 as shown in FIG. The medal discharge port 58 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 guides the medal receiver 59. The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiver 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the addition of the game medium is established on the activated line. There is.

  Below the medal insertion slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided which is pressed when the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52. In addition, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R, a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting a credited virtual medal and a maximum amount of bets which can be bet at one time, and two virtual medals at one time A second credit insertion button 48 for the purpose and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time are provided.

  A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing the surplus insertion medals and the payout medals at the time of winning as the predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) as virtual medals. When the settlement button 51 is operated under the situation where it is stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal discharge port 58 as a real medal.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 operated at the time of power on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting state of the slot machine 10 from "setting 1" A setting key insertion hole 57 operated to change in the range of setting 6 "is provided.

  Next, the symbols attached to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

  FIG. 4 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, twenty symbols are arranged in a line on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, although the numbers “0” to “19” are assigned to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R, these numbers can be viewed by the main control device 70 from the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. And the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not actually attached. However, the following description will be made using the corresponding numbers.

  As a symbol, "bell" symbol (for example, 19th of left reel 32L), "watermelon" symbol (for example, 18th of left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (for example, 17th of left reel 32L), " "Replay" symbol (for example, 16th of left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 15th of left reel 32L), "LUCKY" symbol (for example, 13th of left reel 32L), "red 7" symbol (for example For example, there are eight types of the 12th of the left reel 32L and the "white 7" symbol (for example, the 10th of the left reel 32L). And as shown in FIG. 4, the number and arrangement | positioning order of various symbols in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are completely different.

  FIG. 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. Each of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R is formed such that among the twenty symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R, there are three symbols which allow the entire symbol to be visible. For this reason, in the state where all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols become visible through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

  In the slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle design of the left reel 32L, the middle design of the middle reel 32M, and the middle design of the right reel 32R. The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started with a prescribed number of medals bet, and when the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, a benefit of paying out the medal, re-playing Any of the profit and the transition of the gaming state is awarded.

  That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which winning can be established. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the upper line pattern of left reel 32L, the subline SL1 connecting middle step pattern of middle reel 32M and the lower line pattern of right reel 32R, the upper line pattern of left reel 32L, the upper line pattern of middle reel 32M and the upper pattern of right reel 32R The subline SL2 connected, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the subline SL3 connecting the lower symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle step symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R Even if a combination of symbols to be won is established on a line extending in a straight line, such as the subline SL4 connecting the upper symbols of, the winning is not established.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, the correspondence between the combination of symbols to be awarded and the benefit to be awarded when winning will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view for explaining the correspondence between a combination of symbols to be won and a benefit to be awarded when the symbol is won.

  As a small winning combination in which medals are paid out, there are a first compensation winning, a second compensating winning, a third compensating winning, a bell winning, a first watermelon winning, a second watermelon winning and a cherry winning. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "BAR" symbol or the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, of the right reel 32R If the stop symbol is a "bell" symbol, it will be the first compensation prize. In addition, on mainline ML, the stop symbol of left reel 32L is either "watermelon" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol, the stop symbol of middle reel 32M is "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of right reel 32R is If it is a "bell" symbol, it will be the second compensation prize. Further, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, It will be the third compensation prize. When one of the first compensation winning to the third compensation winning becomes, the number of objects to be provided with game media becomes "1".

  When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the bell prize is won It becomes. When a bell prize is won, the number of objects to be provided with game media is "9".

  The stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "watermelon" symbol. Watermelon wins. When the first watermelon winning is achieved, the number of objects to be provided with game media is "7".

  When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the second Watermelon wins. When the second watermelon winning is achieved, the number of objects to be provided with game media is "7".

  When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML becomes the "cherry" symbol, it is a cherry winning even if the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R are both. In the case of a cherry winning, the number of objects to be provided with game media is "2".

  A normal replay prize, a first RT replay prize, a second RT replay prize, a first fall replay, as a prize provided with a replay bonus that allows the player to play the next game without betting medals (or virtual medals). There is a prize and the second fall replay prize. Specifically, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol In the case, you usually get a Replay prize. If the stop symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol, the first RT It becomes a replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol, the second RT It becomes a replay prize. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol, the first It will be a fall replay prize. If the stop symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol, the second It will be a fall replay prize.

  When one of the above-described replay wins, it becomes possible to play the next game while making the bet unnecessary for both the medal and the virtual medal. Specifically, when any of the replay wins in a game in which three bets of medals are made, the game of the next game may be started in a bet of three sheets, making betting unnecessary for both medals and virtual medals. It becomes possible.

  Further, among the various replay wins, the first RT replay win, the second RT replay win, the first fall replay win, and the second fall replay win are not only the opportunity to give the replay win bonus but also the transition to the gaming state. Become. In the slot machine 10, a plurality of types of gaming states are set such that the types of winning combinations to be selected for the lottery and the winning probability of each combination are different in the lottery process of the winning combinations. Occurs when a replay prize that is a trigger is established. The contents of each gaming state and the transition conditions to each gaming state will be described in detail later.

  There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as state transition prizes in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is "red 7" If it is a symbol, it will be the first BB prize. In the case where the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol , It will be the 2nd BB prize. When the first BB winning or the second BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

  The BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be provided per unit game count is higher than in the normal mode described later and in the non-AT state (this state is also referred to as a normal gaming state). Furthermore, the BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be provided per unit game count is higher than any gaming state other than the BB state. Specifically, the player is made to be able to establish a bell prize, and is elected with a higher probability (for example, about 1 / 1.1) than in the case of other gaming states, and each reel 32L if the player is elected to the role. , 32M, 32R, and the bell winning is established regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational position of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The BB state continues over a plurality of games, and ends when the end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. Although the end condition is arbitrary, it is set as the end condition that the total number of gaming media provided after the BB state is started is equal to or more than the end reference number (for example, “350”) in the slot machine 10 There is.

  Next, an apparatus for executing various types of notification and various types of effects will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided on the upper portion of the front door 12 and an image display device 63 is provided. The upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a mode corresponding to the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, and is controlled to emit light in a mode corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so as to perform a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63. The speakers 62 are provided as a left-right pair, and sound output is controlled so that a sound or a voice corresponding to the abnormality is output when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, and a sound or a voice corresponding to a winning result Sound output is controlled so as to be output. In addition, the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled so that the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63 is performed.

  The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, and may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is display-controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning result of the combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface.

  Credit panel 65 that displays the number of virtual medals stored and stored on display panel 21L, 21M, 21R on game panel 20 of front door 12, and it became an object of grant at the time of a small winning combination When the display order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified by the image display device 63, the special display unit 67 displaying the contents corresponding to the notified contents Are provided respectively. These display parts 65 to 67 are constituted by a 7-segment display, and for each segment, a single color emission type LED such as green is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and some or all of the display portions 65 to 67 are configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display It is also good.

  The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to the back plate of the housing 11. The main control device 70 is configured such that the main control substrate 71 is accommodated in a substrate box. In the case of opening the substrate box, it is necessary to release the fastening state, and a fractured part will occur when the fastening state is released. By checking the presence or absence of the broken portion, it is possible to simply check whether the substrate box has been opened.

  The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 80 in addition to the main control device 70. The effect control device 80 is disposed on the front door 12 so as to be superimposed behind the image display device 63. The effect control device 80 executes control of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 based on the command received from the main control device 70. In the same manner as the main control device 70, the effect control device 80 is configured such that the control substrate is accommodated in the substrate box.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The main control device 70 has a main control board 71 which controls the main control of the game. The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71. The MPU 72 is a ROM 73 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 72 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A certain RAM 74, a clock circuit 75 for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, etc. are incorporated. The fact that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 72 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip.

  The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the reel index sensor 36), the start detection sensor 41a for detecting the operation of the start lever 41, and the stop detection for individually detecting the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44 Sensors 42a, 43a, 44a, inserted medal detection sensors 45a, 45b for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, credit input detection sensors 47a, 48a for individually detecting the operation of the respective credit insertion buttons 47, 48, 49 49a, a settlement detection sensor 51a for detecting the operation of the settlement button 51, a payout detection sensor for the hopper device 53, a reset detection sensor 56a for detecting the operation of the reset button 56, and a setting key inserted in the setting key insertion hole 57 Various sensors such as setting key detection sensor 57a for detecting Sa is connected, these signals from the sensors are input to the MPU 72.

  By the way, two inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b are provided in parallel in the guiding direction of the guiding passage in the guiding passage through which the medal inserted from the medal insertion port 45 is guided to the hopper device 53. ing. That is, as the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a provided on the upstream side of the guide passage and the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a are provided on the downstream side of the guide passage. And a second inserted medal detection sensor 45b. After the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a is in the ON state and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b is in the OFF state, both the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are turned ON. As the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a is in the OFF state and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b is in the ON state, the MPU 72 specifies that one medal has been inserted. Ru. A new medal is detected by the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a before the above-described series of cycles is completed and both the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are turned off. The guiding channel is formed so that it does not occur.

  The reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor 33), the selector drive unit 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the special display unit 67, the effect control device 80, etc. are connected to the output side of the MPU 72 ing. In each game, the MPU 72 performs rotational drive control of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31. As already described, the selector 52 detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 by the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b if the acceptance is permitted, and then guides it to the hopper device 53, and if the acceptance is prohibited It has a function of discharging to the medal tray 59 without detection by the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b. The selector drive unit 52a has a function to switch the state of the selector 52 between the acceptance permission state and the acceptance prohibition state. Specifically, the position for acceptance of the passage switching piece provided in the selector 52 is used. Operate between the and the position for no reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state by switching the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

  Further, the MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when the small winning combination is established and the payout of the medal is executed. The MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 80 at each timing of each game, and transmits a command for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63 to the effect control device 80. In such a case, display control of the special display unit 67 is executed so that display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the effect control device 80, while the direct display control of the special display unit 67 is performed by the MPU 72. That is, for the image display device 63 to be subjected to relatively complicated display control, the direct display control is executed in the effect control device 80, and the special display unit 67 to be subjected to relatively simple display control Direct display control is executed in the MPU 72. As a result, while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72, it is possible to perform both the display emphasizing the improvement in the degree of attention to the effect and the display emphasizing the reliability.

  The power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply unit 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies drive power to the main control unit 70 and other electronic devices of the slot machine 10 and a power failure monitoring circuit, and the power failure monitoring circuit applies the power supply unit from an external power supply. The voltage which is being monitored is monitored, and a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72 when the voltage falls below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing by receiving a power failure signal, and enables recovery to the processing state before the power failure after power recovery. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power-off power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power-off power in a situation where supply of operation power from the external power supply is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, data can be stored and stored in the RAM 74 in a state (for example, one day or two days) where backup power can be supplied by the power supply part during power interruption Be done. However, by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 in a state where the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 is pressed, the data stored in the RAM 74 is initialized.

  The effect control device 80 includes an effect control board 81 for controlling the execution of various types of notification and various types of effects. An MPU 82 is mounted on the effect control board 81. The MPU 82 is a ROM 83 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 82 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A certain RAM 84 is incorporated, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  The fact that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 82 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip. Also, backup power is not supplied from the power supply unit of the power supply device 54 to the RAM 84 during interruption of the supply of operating power from the external power supply, but backup power is supplied to the RAM 84. It is also good.

  The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The MPU 72 of the main control apparatus 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82 as described above, and receives various commands from the MPU 72. An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62 and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. The MPU 82 executes the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display control of the image display device 63 based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, thereby various notification and various effects. To be done.

  In addition to the MPU 82, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like are mounted on the effect control board 81, though not shown. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the image display device 63. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data of the video RAM, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and causes the image display device 63 to display it. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the image display device 63. The character ROM holds bitmapped image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table to be referred to when determining the color to be expressed in each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 82 determines the execution content of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control unit 70, the drawing list for instructing the content of the image corresponding to each update timing is given to VDP according to the execution content of the determined effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM in accordance with the drawing list, and uses the read image data to create display data in the video RAM. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63 to cause the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

  In the following description, the MPU 72, the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73 and the main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 82, the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 of the effect control device 80 are respectively described The MPU 82, the effect ROM 83, and the effect RAM 84 are referred to.

  Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing started in the main MPU 72 when the supply of operation power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the main processing, first, initialization processing is executed (step S101). In the initialization process, the interrupt by the timer interrupt process is permitted, and further, various initializations are performed on the registers in the main MPU 72, the I / O device, and the like.

  After the initialization process is completed, it is determined whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the ON operation is performed (step S102). When the ON operation is performed (step S102: YES), if the reset button 56 is not ON when the power switch 55 is ON (step S103: NO), the winning probability setting process is executed as it is (Step S105). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is turned on when the power switch 55 is turned on (step S103: YES), the clear process (step S104) is performed, and then the winning probability setting process is performed (step S105) .

  In the clear process, all areas in the main RAM 74 are initialized. In this case, an area for storing setting values of the slot machine 10 in the main RAM 74, an area for an end screen counter 113 to be described later, an area for storing data indicating whether or not the BB state is stored, and a total of gaming media in the BB state. An area storing data indicating the number of grants, an area storing data indicating whether the AT state is stored, an area storing data for specifying the end condition of the AT state, and a lottery mode to be described later Each area of the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0”, including the area in which data indicating the type is stored. As a result, when the clear process is executed, the normal gaming state is established regardless of the state before the power is turned off, and the state of the power before the power is turned off is controlled by the progress of the game triggered by the occurrence of abnormality. If there is, the abnormal state is released.

  In the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read on the condition that the setting key is inserted and the ON operation is performed, and the current setting value is displayed on the special display portion 67 provided on the game panel 20. The special display section 67 is a display section for executing a corresponding notification when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, and is also used for displaying setting values at the time of setting change. Be done. When the clear process of the main RAM 74 (step S104) is executed, a display corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed on the special display unit 67 when the winning probability setting process starts, and the clear process (step S104) Is not executed, a display corresponding to the set value in the state before the power shutoff is performed. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the setting value after the updating is displayed on the special display unit 67. When the reset button 56 is operated in a situation where the setting value is “setting 6”, the setting value is updated to “setting 1”. When the ON operation of the setting key is canceled after the start lever 41 is operated, the winning probability setting process is ended. In this case, the display of the setting value on the special display unit 67 is ended. After the winning probability setting process is executed, the process proceeds to the normal process (step S106). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

  When the setting key ON operation is not performed in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process after step S107 is executed. The power recovery process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power is shut off.

  In the power recovery process, the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the setting value of the slot machine 10 is normal (step S107). Specifically, it is determined that the setting value is normal if the setting value is any of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and is determined to be abnormal if the setting value is “0” or “7” or more. If the set value is normal, it is checked whether "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S108). The power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the processing at the time of a predetermined power failure is normally executed when the supply of the operation power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped, the power failure flag is "1". Will be set. If "1" is set in the power failure flag, it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S109). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to confirm whether the value is normal or not.

  If all the steps S107 to S109 are affirmed, this means that the power failure process at the time of the previous power failure has been normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer stored in the work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 and saved in the stack area 74b for specific control which will be described later in the main RAM 74. By restoring the above data to the register of the main MPU 72, the state of the register of the main MPU 72 is restored to the state before the power is shut off (step S110). Further, the power failure flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S111). Thereafter, after a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery processing is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 (step S112), the address returns to the address before the power is turned off (step S113).

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in any of step S107 to step S109, the operation inhibiting process is executed. In the operation inhibiting process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is inhibited (step S114), and all actuators connected to the output port are cleared by clearing all output ports of the main MPU 72 to "0". Is turned off (step S115), and error notification processing is performed to notify the hole manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S116). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the clear process (step S104).

  Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 msec.

  In the register save process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the stack area 74b for specific control described later in the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is checked whether "1" is set in the power failure flag, and when "1" is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S203, and processing upon power failure is executed.

  The power failure flag is set when the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the transmission of the command has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, the present process is terminated to return to the timer interrupt process and the transmission of the command is completed. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is stored in a work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators not shown are turned off. Then, a determination value for determining whether the data in the main RAM 74 is normal or not is calculated when the power failure is eliminated, and stored in a work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later in the main RAM 74. Ban. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in preparation for the fact that the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed.

  When the power failure flag is not set in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, the watchdog timer clear processing is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S205, interrupt termination declaration processing is performed to enable setting of the next timer interrupt to the main MPU 72 itself. In step S206, in order to rotate the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R, stepping motor control processing for driving the respective stepping motors 33 is performed. In step S207, the state of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and a sensor monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the read result is normal or not. In step S208, it is monitored whether or not the release operation for releasing the error notification is performed, and when it is specified that the release operation for releasing the error notification is performed, the error notification is released. The anomaly notification cancellation command for the purpose side is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82. As a result, even if any type of abnormality notification is being performed, the abnormality notification is canceled. Note that when the reset button 56 is pressed in a situation where a predetermined lock operation is being performed on the key cylinder 14, a release operation for releasing the abnormality notification is performed.

  In step S209, timer operation processing is performed to reduce the values of the counters and timers. In step S210, a counter process is performed to externally output the result of counting the bet number of medals and the number of payouts. In step S211, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the effect MPU 82 is performed. In step S212, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port. In step S213, the value of each register saved in the specific control stack area 74b described later in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 is restored to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72, respectively. Thereafter, in step S214, an interrupt permitting process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupting process is ended.

  Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  First, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (step S301), and thereafter, display clear processing is performed (step S302). In the display clear process, when display control of the special display unit 67 is performed so that a predetermined display is performed in the previous game, the predetermined display is erased. As a result, the special display unit 67 is in the unlit state where nothing is displayed.

  Thereafter, start waiting processing is executed (step S303). FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing start waiting processing. In the start waiting process, when any replay winning is generated in the previous game (step S401: YES), an automatic insertion process for setting the bet number of gaming media equal to the number of bets in the previous game (Step S402). Specifically, the value of the bet counter provided in the work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74 is set to a value corresponding to the bet number in the previous game. The bet counter is a counter for specifying the bet number of game media in each game by the main MPU 72.

  In the start waiting process, when medals are detected in the regular order as already described by the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b (step S403: YES), a work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74. If the value of the bet counter provided in is not more than the maximum prescribed number "3" (step S404: NO), the value of the bet counter is incremented by 1 (step S405), and the value of the bet counter is the maximum prescribed number. If the value is "3" or more (step S404: YES), the value of the credit counter provided in the work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S406). The credit counter is a counter for specifying the number of virtual medals stored and stored by the main MPU 72. When the automatic insertion process (step S402) is executed, the value of the bet counter in the slot machine 10 is equal to or larger than the maximum prescribed number, and therefore, when the medals are detected in the regular order ( Step S403: YES) The value of the credit counter is incremented by one.

  In the start waiting process, when one of the credit input buttons 47 to 49 is operated (step S 407: YES), the credit input corresponding process is executed to set the bet number corresponding to the operation. (Step S408). In the credit insertion handling process, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, the maximum amount of gaming media bettable at that time is made to be bet, and the second credit insertion button 48 or When the 3 credit insertion button 49 is operated, a bet state corresponding to that is made to be made. In this case, when a virtual medal is used for the bet, a value for the number of virtual medals betted is subtracted from the credit counter. In addition, when virtual medals of the number necessary to set the bet number corresponding to the operated credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 are not stored and stored, bets can be made in relation to the virtual medals stored and stored. The maximum amount of gaming media is betted. When the automatic insertion process (step S402) is performed, the operations of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 are invalidated.

  In the start waiting process, when the value of the bet counter is equal to or more than the maximum prescribed number and the value of the credit counter is equal to or more than the upper limit storage number (specifically, "50") (step S409: YES), the acceptance prohibition process is executed. (Step S410). In the reception prohibition process, the selector 52 is set in the reception prohibited state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a. Thus, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal receiver 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b. In addition, when it is already in the reception prohibition state, the state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the bet counter is less than the maximum prescribed number or when the value of the credit counter is less than the upper limit storage number (step S409: NO), the acceptance permission process is executed (step S411). In the reception permission process, the selector 52 is set to the reception permission state by starting the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a. Thereby, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b. If the acceptance permission state has already been made, the state is maintained.

  In the start waiting process, the first non-specific control process for monitoring the frauds on the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b is executed (step S412). The processing content of the first non-specific control processing will be described in detail later.

  In the start waiting process, when the settlement button 51 is operated (step S413: YES) and the automatic insertion process (step S402) is not executed (step S414: NO), the bet counter and the credit counter The hopper device 53 is drive-controlled in order to discharge the medals corresponding to the total number to the medal receptacle 59 via the medal discharge port 58 (step S415). As a result, the game medium internally stored is paid out to the player as an actual medal.

  In the start waiting process, the second non-specific control process for monitoring the injustice of the reset button 56 is executed (step S416). The processing content of the second non-specific control processing will be described in detail later.

  Returning to the description of the normal processing (FIG. 10), after executing the start waiting processing of step S303, it is determined whether or not the bet number of medals has reached a prescribed number ("3" in this embodiment) (step 304). If the bet amount has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S303). If the bet number has reached the specified number, it is determined whether the start lever 41 has been operated (step S305). If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S303). On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, after the main line ML is validated, the acceptance prohibition process described above is executed (step S306). Thus, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal receiver 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b. Thereafter, a lottery process for performing a lottery of a part in the current game is executed (step S307), and drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in a mode corresponding to the result of the current lottery process (step S307). The reel control process is executed (step S308).

  Thereafter, medal payout processing is executed (step S309). In the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is established in the current game, a process for providing the player with medals or virtual medals in number corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is awarded, a value corresponding to the small winning combination is added to the credit counter, and when the value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit storage number, the upper limit storage number is exceeded. The hopper device 53 is controlled so as to pay out the medals for several minutes to the medal receiver 59.

  After that, a response process at the end of the game is executed to enable setting of the gaming state corresponding to the result of the current game (step S310). Then, the acceptance processing described above is executed (step S311). Thereby, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b.

  The lottery process executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 10) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, a random number to be used when performing a success / failure determination of a winning combination is acquired (step S501). In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates a random number of 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 74. With this configuration, the random number can be acquired promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

  After the random number is obtained, a lottery table for performing a pass / fail determination of the winning combination is read out from data for specific control described later in the main ROM 73 (step S502). Here, in the slot machine 10, there are prepared in advance six probability of winning from “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. By performing the above, it is possible to set which lottery process is to be performed based on which winning probability. It should be noted that the “provision n + 1” is a winning probability that is more advantageous for the player than the “prevention n”. Further, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery table is different in the main MPU 72 even in the case of setting values of the same stage, a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode. In addition, as a game state, a BB state exists separately from the state of each of these lottery modes. In step S502, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current setting value and the current gaming state is selected.

  The lottery table corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode will be described by taking the case of “setting 3” as an example. First, the normal mode lottery table selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 13 is an explanatory view for explaining the lottery table for the normal mode. In the following description, the explanatory view of FIG. 14 will be referred to as appropriate.

  In the normal mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 13, index values IV are set, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. The point value PV defines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the free run counter.

  Specifically, bell winning data and first compensation winning data are set to index value IV = 1. In the case of winning with index value IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 14, when the first stop (reel on which the stop command is generated first) is the left reel 32L, the second stop target and the third stop target are Regardless of the type of reel and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the bell winning is surely generated, and in other cases, the first compensating winning is surely generated.

  In the slot machine 10, reel control is performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can slide up to a maximum of four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, reel control is performed for each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to stop the operation until the specified time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to make it easier to achieve a prize corresponding to the winning combination, and to avoid that a prize corresponding to the combination not winning is established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slipped is limited as described above, a combination of symbols for achieving a winning is formed on one reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44, if there are five or more symbols between the component symbols, it may happen that the component symbols do not stop on the main line ML (the event is also called "dropout") Say). The first compensation prize to the third compensation prize, the bell prize and the various replay prizes are prize modes in which no dropout occurs when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the corresponding order, and the first watermelon prize, the second The watermelon prize, the cherry prize, the first BB prize and the second BB prize are prize modes in which dropping may occur depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  In the index value IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 13, bell winning data and second compensation winning data are set. When the index value IV = 2 is won, as shown in FIG. 14, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reel and the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. Regardless of the operation timing of the bell winning combination is reliably established, otherwise, the second compensation winning combination is reliably established.

  As shown in FIG. 13, bell winning data and third compensating winning data are set to the index value IV = 3. When the index value IV = 3 is won, as shown in FIG. 14, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reel and the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. The bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing, and in the other cases, the third compensating winning is surely established.

  As shown in FIG. 13, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV = 4. When winning with index value IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 14, the first watermelon winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the first watermelon winning may not be established.

  As shown in FIG. 13, only the second watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV = 5. In the case of winning with the index value IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 14, the second watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the second watermelon winning may not be established.

  As shown in FIG. 13, only cherry winning data is set to the index value IV = 6. In the case of winning with the index value IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 14, cherry winning may be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning is not established.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the first BB winning data is set to the index value IV = 7. When winning with the index value IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 14, the first BB prize can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the first BB winning may not be established. Further, as shown in FIG. 13, second BB winning data is set to index value IV = 8. In the case of winning with the index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 14, the second BB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second BB winning is not established.

  Here, the winning data other than the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data is erased in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning is achieved, and is held in the games following the winning game. It does not go over. On the other hand, the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data correspond to the next and subsequent games of the winning game except when the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S104). It will be kept in memory until winning is achieved. In this case, in the game in which the first BB win data or the second BB win data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first BB win data and the second BB win data is excluded from the lottery targets. This makes it possible to prevent the BB winning data from being newly stored despite the fact that the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is already stored, and a plurality of BB winning data are accumulated. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the normal replay winning data and the first RT replay winning data are set to the index value IV = 9 to 12, respectively. In this case, when the index value IV = 9 is won, as shown in FIG. 14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, and the second stop (the reel where the second stop command is issued) is the left reel 32L. If the third stop (reel where the stop command is finally generated) is the right reel 32R, the first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, otherwise In the above, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. When the index value IV = 10, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in the case other than that, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 11, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in the case other than that, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 12, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in the case other than that, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

  When the normal mode lottery table shown in FIG. 13 is selected, the probability of winning when index value IV = 1, the probability of winning when index value IV = 2, and the probability of index value IV = 3 The probability of becoming is approximately 1 / 5.0, and the probability of winning at index value IV = 4 is approximately 1/131, and the probability of winning at index value IV = 5 is approximately 1 It is / 187 and the probability of winning in the case of index value IV = 6 is about 1/423, the probability of winning in the case of index value IV = 7, and the victory in the case of index value IV = 8 The probability is about 1/218 each, the probability of winning at index value IV = 9, the probability of winning at index value IV = 10, the probability of winning at index value IV = 11, Probability of winning in the fine index value IV = 12 is about 1 / 28.0, respectively.

  Here, in the normal mode lottery table, as described above, first RT replay winning data is set as winning data of index value IV = 9 to 12 in addition to the normal replay winning data (see FIG. 13). The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is approximately 1 / 7.0. When the player wins with one of the index values IV = 9 to 12, the stop corresponding to the winning combination of the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. When the order is reached, the first RT replay winning is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 12) is the first RT mode lottery table.

  Next, the first RT mode lottery table selected in the case of the “setting 3” and the first RT mode will be described. 15 and 16 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first RT mode lottery table.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 15, the winning combination data set to each of the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. It is the same as 13). In this case, the combination that enables the provision of gaming media is set to index value IV = 1 to 6, and the winning combination data and each winning probability set to each of index values IV = 1 to 6 are By being the same, the types of roles that enable the provision of game media and the winning probability of those roles are mutually the same in each of the normal mode and the first RT mode. Further, BB winning data is set to index values IV = 7 to 8 similarly to the normal mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the same as that for the normal mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning in any of the BB roles in the normal mode and the first RT mode is the same.

  The winning combination data set to index value IV = 9 or later is different from the normal mode. Specifically, in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 15, second RT replay winning data is set as winning data of index value IV = 9 to 12 in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is approximately 1 / 10.1. In the case of winning with index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 16, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The second RT replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In other cases, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 10, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. When the index value IV = 11, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. When the index value IV = 12, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In the first RT mode, the stop order corresponds to the winning combination in which the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is a win with index value IV = 9 to 12 When it becomes, the second RT replay winning is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When shifting to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 12) is a lottery table for the second RT mode.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 15, as the winning data of the index value IV = 13 to 18, first fall replay replay winning data is set in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 13-18 is approximately 1 / 10.9.

  When it is elected in the first RT mode lottery table with the index value IV = 13, as shown in FIG. 16, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the first fall replay replay winning at the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 Certainly occur regardless of the situation. When the index value IV = 14 is won, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the first falling replay win occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 15, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the first falling replay win occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. If the index value IV = 16, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the first falling replay win occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 17, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the first falling replay win occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. If the index value IV = 18, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the first falling replay win occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the first fall replay winning combination is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When shifting to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 12) is the normal mode lottery table.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 19. The probability of winning in the index value IV = 19 is set higher than the probability of winning in other roles, and specifically, it is won in about 1 / 6.7. When the index value IV = 19 is won, the normal replay winning will be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R. .

  In the first RT mode lottery table, an index value IV of 9 to 19 is set to enable the establishment of the replay winning. Then, the winning probability of these winning combinations is set to the probability as described above, so that the winning probability (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) of the winning combinations enabling the establishment of the replay winning in the first RT mode is approximately 1 It is /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 7.0. That is, the first RT mode is a gaming state in which the probability of replay is higher than that in the normal mode.

  Next, the second RT mode lottery table selected in the case of the “setting 3” and the second RT mode will be described. 17 and 18 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the second RT mode lottery table.

  In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 17, the winning combination data set to each of the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 13) and the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 15). In this case, the combination that enables the provision of gaming media is set to index value IV = 1 to 6, and the winning combination data and each winning probability set to each of index values IV = 1 to 6 are By being the same, the types of roles that enable the provision of game media and the winning probability of those roles are mutually the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. In addition, BB winning data is set to index value IV = 7 to 8 similarly to the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the winning probability is the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery for the first RT mode. It is identical to the table. That is, the probability of winning in any of the BB roles in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode is the same.

  The winning combination data set to index value IV = 9 or later is different from the normal mode and the first RT mode. More specifically, in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 17, second fall replay replay win data is set as the win data of index value IV = 9 to 14 in addition to the normal replay win data. . The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 9 to 14 is approximately 1 / 5.5.

  In the case of winning with index value IV = 9 in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 18, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay replay winning at the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 Certainly occur regardless of the situation. When the index value IV = 10, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning combination reliably occurs regardless of the operation timings of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 11, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning combination reliably occurs regardless of the operation timings of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 12, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning combination reliably occurs regardless of the operation timings of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 13, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning combination reliably occurs regardless of the operation timings of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the index value IV = 14 is won, the normal replay winning is performed when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning combination reliably occurs regardless of the operation timings of the respective stop buttons 42 to 44. When the second fall replay winning combination is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 12) is the first RT mode lottery table.

  Only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 15 in the second RT mode lottery table. The probability of winning with the index value IV = 15 is set higher than the probability of winning with the other part, and specifically, it is won with about 1 / 6.3. When the index value IV = 15 is won, the normal replay winning will be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. .

  In the second RT mode lottery table, an index value IV of 9 to 15 is set to a combination that enables establishment of a replay winning combination. Then, the winning probability of these winning combinations is set to the probability as described above, so that the winning probability (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) of the winning combinations enabling the establishment of the replay winning in the second RT mode is approximately 1 It is /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 7.0. That is, the second RT mode is a gaming state in which the probability of replay is higher than that in the normal mode. On the other hand, the replay probability in the first RT mode is approximately 1 / 2.9. That is, the second RT mode has the same replay probability as the first RT mode. However, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the replay probability in the first RT mode is the same as the replay probability in the second RT mode. For example, although the replay probability is slightly different between the first RT mode and the second RT mode The second RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the first RT mode, or the first RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the second RT mode.

  The lottery table for the normal mode, the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the lottery table for the second RT mode are set in one-to-one correspondence with each of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and the setting value is high. Although the winning probability of the BB combination is higher as it is, the replay probability set in each lottery mode is the same or substantially the same regardless of which setting value. In addition, in a situation where one of the BB roles has been won, the first BB role and the second BB may be in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode so that the BB roles are not won in duplicate. The part is excluded from the lottery object. In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table in the main ROM 73, the BB lottery referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 12) in the BB state. A table is stored. In the lottery table for BB, only three types of roles of bell, first watermelon and second watermelon are set as the lottery target roles, and the probability of winning the bell is set to about 1 / 1.1. The winning probability of the first watermelon combination is set to about 1/100, and the winning probability of the second watermelon combination is set to about 1/100. As a result, in the BB state, the expected number of game media to be provided per unit game number is higher than in other game states.

  Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 12), after selecting the lottery table (step S502), the index value IV is set to "1" (step S503), and the determination value DV used when determining the success or failure of the winning combination is set. (Step S504). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the first determination value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S501 is set as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to “1”, which is the current index value IV, is added to the random number value. A new judgment value DV is set.

  After that, it is judged whether or not the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV (step S505). It is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds “65535” in the success or failure determination of the winning combination. If "65535" is exceeded, the winning data acquisition process for setting the data of the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S506). In the winning data acquisition process, all the winning data set for the current index value IV in the reference lottery table is set in the main RAM 74. If the winning data is set, if the winning data is winning data other than BB winning data, “0” is cleared after the end of the current game regardless of the presence or absence of winnings corresponding to the winning data. In the case of winning data, "0" is cleared when a winning is achieved.

  If the determination value DV does not exceed “65535” (step S505: NO), it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV has been dropped. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S507), and it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is an object to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV incremented by one has exceeded the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined whether the determination is yes or no, the process returns to step S504, and the determination of the combination is continued. At this time, in step S504, a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for the determination of the success or failure of the previous combination to obtain a new determination value DV. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a winning combination has been made on the basis of the determination value DV.

  When the process of step S506 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S508, it means that the determination on the winning combination of the winning combination has ended. In this case, after the stop information first setting process of setting the stop information for reel stop control is executed (step S509), the process of determining the effect content is executed (step S510). In the effect content determination process, a process for determining the content of the outline of the effect to be performed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in the current game is executed. As the contents of the outline, the high expectation content, the middle expectation content, and the low expectation content are set such that the expectation of occurrence of the BB state or the AT state described later gradually decreases. In the process of determining the contents of presentation, a lottery table corresponding to a combination of the condition as to whether or not to shift to the AT state within a predetermined number of games and the condition as the winning combination in the current game is used to The contents of the outline will be decided by lottery.

  In the situation where it is determined to shift to the AT state within a predetermined number of games, the high expectation content is obtained with a probability of 98% for the situation where it is determined to shift to the AT state within a predetermined number of games. With the 2% probability of being selected, the middle expectation content is selected with a probability of 2%, and in the situation where it is decided to shift to the AT state within the predetermined number of games, the probability of 80% when winning the BB role When the high expectation level content is selected and the medium expectation level content is selected with a probability of 20%, and the player is elected to the BB combination in a situation where it is not determined to shift to the AT state within the predetermined number of games 70% The high expectation content is selected with the probability of 0, the middle expectation content and the low expectation content are selected with the probability of 15% each, and it is not determined to shift to the AT state within the predetermined number of games If the player is elected to any of index values IV = 7 to 10 in a situation where he is not elected to the BB role, the high expectation content is selected with a probability of 30% and the probability of each is 35%. Any of the index values IV = 7 to 10 in a situation where it is not determined to shift to the AT state within the predetermined number of games and the expectation content and the low expectation content are selected, and in a situation where the BB role is not won If the player does not win, the low expectation content is selected with a probability of 80% and the middle expectation content is selected with a probability of 20%.

  Information corresponding to the contents of the outline determined in the determination process of the effect content is set as a game start command, and the game start command is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 82 (step S511). The game start command is a command for causing the effect MPU 82 to recognize that a new game has been started, and for causing the effect MPU 82 to recognize the contents of the outline of the effect determined by the main MPU 72. It is a command, and is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  When receiving the game start command, the effect-side MPU 82 grasps the contents of the outline of the effect in the current game from the game start command in the other processes in the notification process (FIG. 44) described later. The details of the details of the effect are determined by lottery in a manner according to the contents of the outline of the effect. Then, a data table corresponding to the contents of the determined effect is read out from the effect side ROM 83 to the effect side RAM 84, light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62 and display of the image display device 63 according to the read data table Execute control.

  Here, in the determination process of the effect content in the main side MPU 72, in all the game states, the lottery process of the effect content is executed in the same mode no matter which index value IV = 1 to 3 is won, Even if the index value IV is equal to 9 or later, the lottery process of the effect content is executed in the same manner. Then, except when notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed in the special display portion 67, in the case where one of index value IV = 1 to 3 and index value IV = 9 or later is won. Information that enables identification of the individual index value IV is not transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the effect MPU 82. Thus, the effect executing means such as the image display device 63 directly controlled by the effect MPU 82 is not limited to the notification of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the special display section 67. It is possible to prevent the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R from being notified.

  Thereafter, notification control processing is executed (step S512). In the notification control process, the details are described later, but the process for performing display control of the special display unit 67 is executed, and the notification corresponding to the display content in the special display unit 67 is executed by the image display device 63 Execute the process to

<Reel control processing>
Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 10) will be described. Prior to the description of the reel control processing, the stepping motor 33 for rotating the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described in more detail.

  FIG. 19A is a connection diagram showing a drive system of the stepping motor 33, and FIG. 19B is a diagram showing drive characteristics of the stepping motor 33. As shown in FIG. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of phase excitation.

  As the stepping motor 33, a hybrid (HB) type two-phase stepping motor is used. The stepping motor is not limited to the hybrid type, and various stepping motors can be used.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the hybrid stepping motor 33 has a rotor 91 disposed at the center, and a stator 90 having first to fourth poles 92 to 95 disposed around the rotor 91. And have. The rotor 91 is composed of a near side rotor 91a magnetized to the N pole and a far side rotor 91b magnetized to the S pole, and teeth and teeth provided around the near side rotor 91a. Between them, the teeth provided around the back rotor 91b are attached to the rotation shaft in a state of being relatively shifted by a half pitch so as to be positioned. And the cylindrical magnet which is not shown in figure is attached between the near side rotor 91a and the back side rotor 91b.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, the exciting coil L0 and the exciting coil L2 are bifilar wound on the first pole 92 and the third pole 94, and the winding end of the exciting coil L0 and the winding start end of the exciting coil L2 Are connected, and a predetermined DC power supply + B (for example, +24 volts) is applied thereto. Similarly, the exciting coil L1 and the exciting coil L3 are also bifilar wound on the second pole 93 and the fourth pole 95, and the winding end of the exciting coil L1 and the winding start end of the exciting coil L3 are connected to each other. Power supply + B is applied.

  The excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L0 of the first pole 92, and the phase in which the first pole 92 is excited to the S pole and the third pole 94 is excited to the N pole is referred to as A phase. A phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L2 94 and the first pole 92 is excited to the N pole and the third pole 94 is excited to the S pole is referred to as a reverse A phase. Similarly, the excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L1 of the second pole 93, and the second pole 93 is excited to the S pole and the fourth pole 95 is excited to the N pole as a B phase. A phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L3 of the fourth pole 95 to excite the second pole 93 to the N pole and excite the fourth pole 95 to the S pole is referred to as reverse B-phase.

  The excitation signal for the stepping motor 33 is given as excitation data to a motor driver 96 shown in FIG. 19 (b). The excitation data is stored in the main RAM 74, and appropriate excitation data is output by timer interrupt processing. An excitation phase for the stepping motor 33 is determined by the excitation data, and an excitation signal (current) is supplied to the excitation phase.

  When the stepping motor 33 is a one-phase excitation drive system, the rotor 91 is turned clockwise or counterclockwise by sequentially applying excitation signals to the A-phase, B-phase, reverse A-phase and reverse B-phase. It can be driven to rotate. That is, for example, when electricity is first applied to the A phase, the protrusion of the first pole 92 which has become the S pole, the teeth of the near side rotor 91a, the protrusion of the third pole 94 which has become the N pole and the teeth of the back side rotor 91b Respectively face each other by suction, and then, when the B phase is energized, the protrusion of the second pole 93 which has become the S pole, the teeth of the near side rotor 91a, the protrusion of the fourth pole 95 which has become the N pole and the back side rotation. The teeth of the child 91b face each other by suction, and then, when the reverse A phase is energized, the projection of the first pole 92 which has become the N pole, the tooth of the back side rotor 91b, and the third pole 94 which has become the S pole. And the teeth of the near side rotor 91a face each other by the attraction force, and then, when the reverse B phase is energized, the teeth of the second pole 93 and the teeth of the back side rotor 91b and the south pole become N pole. The projections of the fourth pole 95 and the teeth of the near side rotor 91a are Face by the suction force. By exciting in this order, the rotor 91 rotates clockwise in FIG. 19 (a).

  In the slot machine 10, one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately performed in an acceleration period to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to maintain constant speed rotation and a period for maintaining constant speed rotation. The first and second phase excitation drive is employed. In the 1-2 phase excitation drive, excitation is performed according to the following excitation sequence (excitation sequence) of (1) to (8). That is, since only one set of excitation is single-phase excitation and two-phase excitation is simultaneous excitation of two phases, as shown in FIG. (1 phase excitation), (2) energize to both A phase and B phase (2 phase excitation), and so on, (3) energize to B phase, (4) to both B phase and reverse A phase Energize, (5) energize reverse A phase, (6) energize both reverse A phase and reverse B phase, (7) energize reverse B phase, (8) both reverse B phase and A phase And then return to (1). In the present embodiment, since the reel is configured to rotate once by the excitation signal of 504 pulses, the angle change based on the excitation signal of 1 pulse, that is, the angle change per step is about 0.714 °.

  FIG. 21A is an explanatory diagram for describing an acceleration table in which an excitation pattern is set in the case of starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  As the initial excitation phase during acceleration, in addition to one-phase excitation which drives only a specific excitation phase, two-phase excitation which simultaneously drives two specific excitation phases can be considered. Although it differs depending on the size and inertia of the reel, etc., it is possible to accelerate the reel from the initial speed zero with one phase excitation in a normal slot machine. However, since two-phase excitation has a larger rotational torque than one-phase excitation, two-phase excitation is preferable for initial excitation in order to obtain a sufficient initial speed.

  In the excitation pattern shown in FIG. 21A, this excitation state is held for 130 interrupts after the two-phase excitation is set in synchronization with the interrupt timing every 1.49 msec. For 2-phase excitation as initial excitation, among the excitation order 2, excitation order 4, excitation order 6 and excitation order 8 shown in FIG. 20, the excitation order corresponding to the excitation phase at the time of the previous rotation stop is selected. It will be.

  After holding the state of 2 phase excitation over 130 interrupts, 1-2 phase excitation is repeated alternately, but as the phase excitation holding period, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), the excitation holding period of 1 phase excitation And the excitation holding period of the two-phase excitation are finely controlled. Specifically, the holding period is set to be gradually shortened so that one-phase excitation following the two-phase excitation, which is the initial excitation, is performed for eight interrupts, and the next two-phase excitation is performed for seven interrupts. It is done. Finally, one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of two interrupts, and finally, one-phase excitation is set to be performed over two interrupts. As described above, since the last of the acceleration table is one-phase excitation, the first type of phase excitation in the constant speed rotation period is two-phase excitation. As described above, by sequentially shortening the holding period in each phase excitation as it approaches constant-speed rotation, high-speed acceleration processing can be realized in a short time, and smooth transition to constant-speed rotation becomes possible.

  Two types of acceleration tables are set in the main ROM 73, and one of these two types of acceleration tables has the number of acceleration sequences, that is, the number of steps set to 24 as shown in FIG. 21 (a). And the other is set to 26 steps in which the number of acceleration orders, that is, the number of steps is larger than in the case of FIG. In this case, in the 26-step acceleration table, two-phase excitation is performed over one interrupt in the twenty-fifth acceleration order, and one-phase excitation is performed over one interrupt in the twenty-sixth acceleration order. As a result, since the type of last phase excitation in the 26-step acceleration table is one-phase excitation as in the 24-step acceleration table, constant speed rotation is performed regardless of which acceleration table is used. The first type of phase excitation in the period is two-phase excitation.

  In addition, the 26-step acceleration table has a longer acceleration period than the 24-step acceleration table. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of interrupts in the first acceleration sequence is smaller for the 26-step acceleration table than for the 24-step acceleration table, and the number of interrupts reduced is The number may be the same as the sum of the number of interrupts in the 25th acceleration order and the number of interrupts in the 26th acceleration order in the 26-step acceleration table. This makes it possible to make the acceleration periods the same or substantially the same regardless of which acceleration table is used.

  When stopping the stepping motor 33, four-phase excitation is used. In the four-phase excitation, all of the A phase, the reverse A phase, the B phase, and the reverse B phase are excited. When two opposite phases are excited, the magnetic flux is canceled out, but while the stepping motor 33 is rotating, a back electromotive force is generated by the induced voltage, for example, the torque of the difference between the current flowing in the A phase and the reverse A phase Occurs. Then, in the case of four-phase excitation, the torque is generated between the two opposing phases. Therefore, it is possible to generate a braking force even with four-phase excitation. However, the braking force in the case of four-phase excitation is smaller than in the case of one-phase excitation.

  The case where the stepping motor 33 is stopped using four-phase excitation will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. FIG. 21B is an explanatory diagram for describing a stop table in which excitation patterns are set in the case of stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

  When the stepping motor 33 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), four-phase excitation is started by generating a stop command in a situation where one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated. . In this case, the timing at which the four-phase excitation is started is defined as the timing after the two-phase excitation is performed over one interrupt. This four-phase excitation is continued for 100 interrupts (149 msec). Then, after four-phase excitation is performed for 100 interrupts, one-phase excitation is performed for 34 interrupts (50.7 msec), and then the one-phase excitation is ended. The phase to be subjected to the one-phase excitation is one phase corresponding to the position of the target stop angle.

  As described above, the rotor 91 of the stepping motor 33 can be smoothly stopped by utilizing the four-phase excitation with the weakest braking force at the start of braking. However, when four-phase excitation is performed due to weak braking force, the rotor 91 is advanced to some extent by inertia from the timing at which the four-phase excitation is started. The number of steps to be advanced by this inertia differs depending on the specifications of the reel unit 31, and although the number of steps can be grasped to some extent at the design stage by experiments using the reel unit 31, it is not constant. Some variation may occur. On the other hand, after the four-phase excitation is performed for a predetermined period, the stop position is performed by performing one-phase excitation for one phase corresponding to the position of the target stop angle for a predetermined period. It becomes possible to set it as the designed position.

  Two types of stop tables are set in the main ROM 73, and one of these two types of stop tables is used when stopping a symbol corresponding to 24 steps to be described later at a predetermined target position, The other is used when the symbol corresponding to 26 steps to be described later is stopped at a predetermined position targeted. The stop table shown in FIG. 21 (b) is a stop table corresponding to 24 steps, and the stop table corresponding to 26 steps is longer than the stop table corresponding to 24 steps when the four-phase excitation is performed. It is set to be long, specifically to 105 interrupts. As a result, using the stop table corresponding to the 26 steps increases the number of steps advanced by inertia by two steps as compared to the case where the stop table corresponding to the 24 steps is used.

  However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the same stop table may be used regardless of whether the symbol to be stopped at a predetermined position is a symbol corresponding to 24 steps or a symbol corresponding to 26 steps. . In this case, whether to stop the symbol corresponding to the 24 steps or stop the symbol corresponding to the 26 steps, it becomes the last step among the number of steps corresponding to the symbol to be stopped at the predetermined position. From when it is recognized that the symbols corresponding to the 26 steps exist at the predetermined position so that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop at the rotational position, from when the use of the stop table is started It is necessary to make the period of longer than the period from becoming the state where it is grasped that the symbol corresponding to the 24 steps exists at the predetermined position, to the start of utilization of the stop table.

  Next, a configuration for managing the rotational position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R using the number of steps of the stepping motor 33 will be described.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, twenty symbols are drawn on the belts of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. On the other hand, the stepping motor 33 and the cylindrical frame member 34 of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are used for the reels having 21 symbols on the belt, 1 The number of steps required to rotate is 504 steps. In this case, if the number of symbols attached to the reels is 21, they are at predetermined positions (visible positions from the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R are at the lower positions of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the range) The number of steps required to switch from one symbol to the next (that is, the number of steps assigned to each symbol) becomes constant in 24 steps. However, if the number of symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is 20, the total number of steps will be less than 504 steps if the number of steps required for symbol switching is constant in 24 steps, 25 Even if the number of steps is constant, the total number of steps will be less than 504 steps, and if it is constant in 26 steps, the total number of steps will exceed 504 steps. On the other hand, if the number of steps required to switch symbols is largely different for each symbol, the sizes of each symbol will be significantly different accordingly, and it is difficult to manage the types of symbols existing at a predetermined position. Become. Furthermore, when stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as described above, one-phase excitation is finally performed, and when stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped at a predetermined position. Since stop control is performed such that the symbol is stopped and displayed at the position at which the excitation corresponding to the last number of steps assigned to the symbol to be displayed is performed, the number of steps allocated to each symbol Preferably, the excitation corresponding to the final number of steps is one-phase excitation.

  Under the circumstances as described above, in the slot machine 10, two types of 24 steps and 26 steps are used as the number of steps assigned to each symbol. FIG. 22 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the number of steps and the phase excitation when it is recognized that the symbol to which 26 steps are assigned is present at a predetermined position, and FIG. (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the number of steps and the phase excitation when it is recognized that a symbol to which 24 steps are assigned is present at a predetermined position. As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), the two-phase excitation and the one-phase excitation are alternately switched at each step regardless of whether the step is 26 steps or 24 steps. And in either of the case of 26 steps and the case of 24 steps, the excitation in the first step number (in the case of “26” in FIG. 22A and in the case of “24” in FIG. 22B) The two-phase excitation is common, and the excitation in the last step number (in the case of “1”) is common in the one-phase excitation. As a result, even if any of the 26 steps and 24 steps is assigned, the final step number can be one-phase excitation. In addition, even if the symbols of 26 steps and the symbols of 24 steps are arranged in any order, the number of last steps of the symbols existing at a predetermined position becomes one phase excitation and the first step of the next symbol The number is two-phase excitation, and in constant-speed rotation, two-phase excitation and one-phase excitation are alternately switched even if the symbol is crossed.

  FIG. 23 is an explanatory view for explaining the number of steps assigned to each symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Twenty symbols in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are a first group, a second group, a third group, and a fourth, with five symbols continuing in the circumferential direction of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as one group. It is classified into four groups of groups.

  The first group is the symbol No. 0 to the symbol No. 4, the second group is the symbol No. 5 to the symbol No. 9, and the third group is the symbol No. 10 to the symbol No. 14; The group is the symbol of No. 15 to the symbol of No. 19. In each group, 26 steps are assigned to the symbols (symbols of 0, 5 and 10, 15 and 15) present at the beginning of the direction of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, 24 steps are assigned to the symbols (No. 1 symbol, No. 6 symbol, No. 11 symbol, No. 16 symbol) existing next to the rotation direction, and the symbol existing next to the rotation direction 26 steps are assigned to (No. 2 symbol, No. 7 symbol, No. 12 symbol, No. 17 symbol), and the symbol existing next to the rotational direction (No. 3 symbol, No. 8 symbol) , 13 symbols, 18 symbols) are assigned 24 steps and are present next to the rotation direction, that is, at the end of the rotation direction of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each group Running symbol (the fourth symbol, Turn symbol, 14th symbol, number 19 symbols) are assigned 26 step.

  In other words, when the top of the rotation direction is 1st in each group, 26 steps are assigned to the 1st, 3rd and 5th symbols, and the 2nd and 4th symbols are present. There are 24 steps assigned to the symbol. In this case, the number of symbols to which 24 steps are assigned is eight, and the number of symbols to which 26 steps are assigned is 12, so the total number of steps is equivalent to one turn of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Step 504 corresponding to In addition, as described above, the arrangement mode of the number of steps is constant in each group, based on the order of the symbols in each group, which one of 26 steps and 24 steps is the number of steps of each symbol It becomes possible to identify.

  Symbol management data is set for each symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The symbol management data is data for managing the type of symbol existing at a predetermined position, and the data amount of symbol management data set in each symbol is 1 byte. The group information is set in the upper 4 bits of the 1-byte data, and the symbol order information is set in the lower 4 bits. The group information is information indicating which group the first group to the fourth group the symbol belongs to, "0" corresponds to the first group, and "1" corresponds to the second group. “2” corresponds to the third group, and “3” corresponds to the fourth group. In addition, the symbol order information is information indicating what number the symbol is present from the top of the rotation direction in each group, “0” corresponds to the first, and “1” corresponds to the second “2” corresponds to the third, “3” corresponds to the fourth, and “4” corresponds to the fifth. Therefore, the symbol management data is, for example, "34H" in hexadecimal if it is the 19th symbol, "20H" in hexadecimal if it is the 10th symbol, and "12H" if it is the 7th symbol. If it is the first symbol, it will be "01H" in hexadecimal.

  The symbol management data is set as described above, and by referring only to the symbol order information set in the lower 4 bits of the symbol management data, it is assigned to the symbol existing at the predetermined position. It becomes possible to specify the number of steps in which In particular, in the configuration in which symbol management data is set as described above, the first symbol in each group, the third symbol and the fifth symbol have the least significant bit of the symbol management data set to "0", and the second symbol For the symbol and the fourth symbol, the least significant bit of the symbol management data is "1". On the other hand, the first symbol, the third symbol and the fifth symbol are assigned 26 steps as already described, and the second symbol and the fourth symbol are assigned 24 steps as already described. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the number of steps allocated to the symbol existing at the predetermined position only by referring to the lowest bit of the symbol management data. Therefore, the processing configuration for specifying the number of steps can be simplified.

  In addition, since the number of symbols included in each group is the same, when the value of the lower 4 bits in the symbol management data of the symbols existing at the predetermined position is “4” in hexadecimal, it is next The symbol that will be present at the predetermined position is uniquely the symbol of the top of the next group. This makes it easy to manage symbols based on symbol management data.

  Hereinafter, the reel control processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, rotation start processing for starting rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (step S601). In the rotation start process, a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) in the previous game is started. If it has not elapsed, it waits until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and the rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74. Do. By performing this process, the process for driving and controlling each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started in the stepping motor control process of step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the stepping motor control process of the left reel 32L. The stepping motor control process is executed also for each of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, but the process configuration is the same as the stepping motor control process for the left reel 32L.

  When the left reel 32L is not rotating and it is the rotation start timing of the left reel 32L (step S701: NO, step S702: YES), the acceleration table (see FIG. 21A) is displayed from the main ROM 73. Reading (step S703), the left reel 32L is started to rotate according to the acceleration table (step S704). Then, in the acceleration period (step S701 and step S705: YES), the acceleration processing is executed according to the above-mentioned acceleration table (step S706). As a result, the left reel 32L is accelerated toward constant speed rotation.

  Here, when reading the acceleration table, by grasping the symbol management data of the symbol stopped at the predetermined position at the start of rotation, the symbol that will pass through the predetermined position next to the symbol is Understand which of the 24 step symbol and the 26 step symbol. And when it is the symbol of 24 steps, the table for acceleration of 24 steps already explained is read from main side ROM 73, processing for acceleration is performed, and when it is the symbol of 26 steps, the acceleration of 26 steps already explained The read table is read from the main ROM 73 to execute the acceleration process. This makes it possible to execute the acceleration processing in a mode corresponding to the symbol stopped at the predetermined position at the start of rotation of the left reel 32L, and drive control in a situation where the left reel 32L is rotating at a constant speed. It will be easier to

  After the acceleration process is performed, a step number monitoring process is performed (step S713). The step number monitoring process is also performed after each process of step S709, step S711, and step S712 described later is executed. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the step number monitoring process.

  In the step number monitoring process, first, it is determined whether it is time to update the number of steps (step S801). When an excitation signal of one pulse is newly given to the stepping motor 33 of the left reel 32L, it is determined that it is the update timing of the number of steps. Further, in the situation where the four-phase excitation is performed in the stop period of the left reel 32L, the rotational position of the left reel 32L changes even if the excitation signal is not newly given. Every time the number of interrupts of the update trigger determined in the design stage of the machine 10 occurs, it is determined that it is the update timing of the number of steps.

  When it is the update timing of the step number (step S801: YES), the value of the step number counter 111 (see FIG. 7) provided in the work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S802). ). The number-of-steps counter 111 is among the number of steps assigned to the symbols to be managed as existing at a predetermined position (the lower position in the range visible to the display window 21L in the left reel 32L). It is a counter for specifying the remaining number of steps in the main MPU 72. In step S812 or step S813, which will be described later, “26” or “24” is set in the step number counter 111 according to the order of symbols in each group, and the set value is updated each time the step number is updated. Subtract one. The step number counter 111 is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  When the value of the step number counter 111 after 1 subtraction becomes “0” (step S 803: YES), processing for updating the symbol to be managed to the symbol in the next order is executed. Specifically, first, the value of lower 4 bits in the symbol management counter 112 (see FIG. 7) provided in the work area 74a for specific control described later in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S804). The symbol management counter 112 has a data amount of 1 byte as in the case of the symbol management data, and is a counter for specifying the symbol management data corresponding to the symbol currently being managed by the main MPU 72. The lower four bits of the symbol management counter 112 correspond to symbol order information, and the upper four bits of the symbol management counter 112 correspond to group information. The symbol management counter 112 is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  When the value of lower 4 bits in the symbol management counter 112 after 1 addition is larger than “4” which is the maximum value (step S805: YES), the value of upper 4 bits in the symbol management counter 112 is incremented by 1 (step S806), the value of lower 4 bits in the symbol management counter 112 is cleared to "0" (step S807). If the value of the upper 4 bits of the symbol management counter 112 after one addition is larger than the maximum value "3" (step S808: YES), all bits of the symbol management counter 112 are cleared to "0" (step S 809).

  As described above, the processing of step S804 to step S809 is performed, whereby the value of the symbol management counter 112 becomes a value corresponding to the symbol in the next order. For example, when the process of step S804 is executed in a situation where "00H" which is a value corresponding to the symbol of No. 0 is set in the symbol management counter 112, the processes of step S806, step S807 and step S809 are executed. Instead, the value of the symbol management counter 112 is "01H" which is a value corresponding to the first symbol. Also, for example, when the processing of step S804 is executed in a situation where "04H" corresponding to the fourth symbol is set in the symbol management counter 112, the processing of step S806 and step S807 is further executed, The value of the symbol management counter 112 is "10H" which is a value corresponding to the fifth symbol. Further, for example, when the process of step S804 is executed in a situation where "34H" corresponding to the 19th symbol is set in the symbol management counter 112, the processes of step S806, step S807 and step S809 are further executed. Thus, the value of the symbol management counter 112 is "00H" which is a value corresponding to the 0th symbol.

  In the step number monitoring process, even if the value of the step number counter 111 after 1 subtraction is not "0" (step S803: NO), the detection state of the reel index sensor 36 of the left reel 32L is in the ON state In the case (step S810: YES), all the bits of the symbol management counter 112 are cleared to "0" (step S809). Thereby, when it is detected by the reel index sensor 36 that the left reel 32L has made one rotation, the symbol to be managed is forcibly set to the symbol of No. 0.

  In the step number monitoring process, when the negative determination is made in step S805, the negative determination is made in step S808, or the process of step S809 is executed, the least significant bit of the symbol management counter 112 is "0". It is determined whether there is any (step S811). When the least significant bit is "0" (step S811: YES), the newly managed symbol is one of the first symbol, the third symbol and the fifth symbol in each group. means. Therefore, "26" is set in the step number counter 111 (step S812). On the other hand, when the least significant bit is "1" (step S811: NO), it means that the newly managed symbol is either the second symbol or the fourth symbol in each group. . Therefore, "24" is set in the step number counter 111 (step S813).

  Returning to the description of the stepping motor control process (FIG. 25) for the left reel 32L, in the constant velocity period after the acceleration period ends (step S701: YES, step S705, step S707 and step S710: NO), for constant velocity The process is executed (step S712). In the constant speed processing, which of the two-phase excitation and the one-phase excitation is to be executed is specified based on the value of the current step number counter 111. Specifically, an excitation signal is output to perform two-phase excitation when the value of the step number counter 111 is even, and one-phase excitation is performed when the value of the step number counter 111 is odd. The excitation signal is output to

  The main MPU 72 treats the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 as invalid during the acceleration period of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the acceleration period ends and the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R When the speed becomes constant, the stop operation of each stop button 42 to 44 is treated as effective. Further, the main MPU 72 is invalidated by turning off the not-shown lamp of the stop buttons 42 to 44 when the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is invalidated including the acceleration period and the invalid period described later. Is notified to the player that the operation of each stop button 42 to 44 is activated, the stop instruction is not generated by displaying the lamps of the stop buttons 42 to 44 which are not generated. Informing the player that it is possible to generate

  Returning to the description of the reel control process (FIG. 24), after executing the rotation start process (step S601), the condition is that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped (step S602: NO), step S603. ~ Execute the process of step S615. Specifically, the third non-specific control process for monitoring the frauds on the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b is first executed (step S603). The processing content of the third non-specific control processing will be described in detail later.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S604). If one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated (step S604: YES), it is determined whether the operation is a valid operation that triggers generation of a stop command for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The effective operation determination process for performing the process is executed (step S605). Although the detailed contents of the effective operation determination process will be described later, if the current operation is an effective operation triggered by the generation of a stop instruction for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a work area for specific control described later in the main RAM 74. "1" is set to the stop command flag provided in 74a. The stop command flag is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  If one of the stop instruction flags is set to "1" (step S606: YES), the stop instruction flag is cleared to "0" (step S607), and then the stop instruction command is set. The stop command command is a command transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 in order to grasp which stop button 42 to 44 is operated to generate a stop command.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the stop button 42 to 44 is operated, the symbol number of the reaching symbol which has reached the predetermined position (the lower end in the present embodiment) is confirmed (step S609). Specifically, the value set in the symbol management counter 112 of the main side RAM 74 is collated with the symbol management data table 121 (see FIG. 7) stored as data for specific control described later in the main side ROM 73. Thus, the symbol numbers of the symbols currently being managed are confirmed. The symbol management data table 121 is a table common to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the correspondence relationship between the symbol management data and the symbol numbers is defined on a one-to-one basis.

  Thereafter, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is grasped based on the stop information stored in the work area 74a for specific control described later in the main side RAM 74 (step S610). In the slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the predetermined position as it is when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, A stop mode in which the corresponding reel is slipped by one pattern and then stopped, a stop mode in which the pattern is slipped by 2 patterns and then stopped, a stop mode in which the pattern is slipped by 3 patterns and then stopped, and after it is slipped by 4 patterns Five patterns of stop modes are provided, including a stop mode for stopping. Therefore, in step S610, any value of "0" to "4" is grasped as the slip number based on stop information stored in a work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74. The stop information is read from the data for specific control described later in the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process (step S509) in the lottery process (FIG. 12) and the reel control process (FIG. 24) In the stop information second setting process (step S615), the change is appropriately made according to the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Thereafter, the grasped slip number is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol to be actually stopped at the predetermined position is determined (step S611).

  After the symbol number of the stop symbol is determined, it is determined whether "1" is set in a braking target flag provided in a work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main side RAM 74 (step S612). The braking target flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that there exist reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which stop control start conditions are satisfied but stop control is not completed. If "1" is not set in the braking target flag (step S612: NO), the process returns to the process of step S602.

  If "1" is set to the braking target flag (step S612: YES), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the stop control (step S613). In the case where the value of the symbol management counter 112 is a value corresponding to the symbol number of the stop symbol, the stop control according to the stop table (see FIG. 21 (b)) is performed. It is a value corresponding to the symbol being stopped and displayed at the position that will be present when the excitation corresponding to the last step number assigned to the current stop symbol is performed by starting. In this case, it is determined that it is the start timing of the stop control. If it is not the start timing of the stop control (step S613: NO), the process returns to the process of step S602. If it is the start timing of the stop control (step S613: YES), "1" is set to the stop start flag provided in the work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74 (step S614). The stop start flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that the stop control using the stop table should be started, and is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. There is.

  Although the details will be described later, in the slot machine 10, stop control may be simultaneously started for a plurality of reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Therefore, in step S613, when there are a plurality of reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for the stop control, the start timing of the stop control for each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for the stop control It is determined whether the Then, in step S614, "1" is set to the stop start flag corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R determined to be the start timing of the stop control.

  When "1" is set to the stop start flag for the left reel 32L, an affirmative determination is made in step S707 in the stepping motor control process (FIG. 25) of the left reel 32L. In addition, when the said affirmation determination is made, this stop start flag is cleared "0". In this case, a stop table (see FIG. 21B) provided in data for specific control described later in the main ROM 73 is read (step S 708), and stop control according to the stop table is started (step S 708). S 709). Then, during the period in which the stop control is being performed (step S710: YES), the stop processing is executed according to the stop table (step S711). As a result, the stop symbol determined this time is stopped and displayed at a position that will be present when phase excitation corresponding to the last step assigned to the stop symbol is performed.

  Here, when reading the stop table, by grasping the symbol management data of the stop symbol, it is grasped which of the symbol of 24 steps and the symbol of 26 steps is the stop symbol. And when it is the symbol of 24 steps, the table for the stop of 24 steps already explained is read from main side ROM 73 and the processing for the stop is executed, and when it is the symbol of 26 steps the stop of 26 steps already explained The read-out table is read from the main ROM 73 and the stop processing is executed. This makes it possible to execute the stop processing in a mode corresponding to the stop symbol, and the stop symbol determined this time is assigned to the stop symbol in any of the 24 step symbols and the 26 step symbols. The display is stopped at a position that will be present when phase excitation corresponding to the last step being performed is performed.

  Incidentally, it is conceivable that "1" is simultaneously set to the stop start flags of the plurality of reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and in this case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, which has "1" set in the stop start flag The above-described stop control is performed by stepping motor control corresponding to each of 32R. In this case, the stop table (FIG. 21B) used for the stop control is the same for any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. That is, the main ROM 73 stores a common stop table for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the stop control for any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed commonly. The stop table is read. In this configuration, a common stop table may be simultaneously read in a work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74, corresponding to each of the plurality of reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a plurality of types of stop tables may be stored in the main ROM 73 in association with the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

  Returning to the description of the reel control process (FIG. 24), after executing the process of step S614, stop information second setting process is performed (step S615), and the process returns to step S602. The stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12), and each stop button 42 can be obtained by using the stop information. It is possible to calculate the slip number (specifically, “0” to “4”) for the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position when the stop operation of ̃44 is performed. As the stop information, the slip table showing the correspondence between each symbol and the slip number corresponds to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and data for specific control described later of the main side ROM 73 Is stored as

  As the process for setting the stop information, the first stop information setting process executed in step S509 of the lottery process (FIG. 12) and the stop information executed in step S615 of the reel control process (FIG. 24) There is a second setting process. In the stop information first setting process, the slip table is set according to the lottery process result. In the stop information second setting process, the slip table stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process is changed after the reel is stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the slip table is changed based on the set win data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop appearance of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  Here, as described above, each symbol is classified into the first group to the fourth group in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, but in the same reel 32L, 32M, 32R, an arrangement in which the symbol arrangement of each group is common It has become. Specifically, for the left reel 32L, there is one "replay" symbol in each group, but the "replay" symbol is the second in each group (if it is the first group or the second group in the first group) For example, it is arranged at No. 6 and No. 11 for the third group and No. 16 for the fourth group. In this case, although four "Replay" symbols are present on the left reel 32L, they exist between one "Replay" symbol and the "Replay" symbol arranged next to the winding direction. The number of symbols is 4 which is the maximum slip number. In addition, although one "bell" symbol exists in each group, the "bell" symbol is the fifth in each group (No. 4 for the first group, and No. 9 for the second group, the third group) In the case of the fourth group and 19 in the case of the fourth group. In this case, although four "bell" symbols are present on the left reel 32L, they exist between one "bell" symbol and the "bell" symbol arranged next to the winding direction. The number of symbols is 4 which is the maximum slip number. Also, there is one "White 7" symbol in the first group and the third group, and there is one "BAR" symbol in the second group and the fourth group, but each of those symbols is In the corresponding group, it is arranged first (No. 1 for the first group, No. 5 for the second group, No. 10 for the second group, and No. 15 for the fourth group). In addition, one "red 7" symbol exists in the first group and the third group, and one "cherry" symbol exists in the second group and the fourth group, but each of those symbols In the corresponding group, it is arranged third (No. 2 for the first group, No. 7 for the second group, No. 12 for the third group, and No. 17 for the fourth group). In addition, one "LUCKY" symbol exists in the first group and the third group, and one "watermelon" symbol exists in the second group and the fourth group, but these symbols correspond to each other. The fourth group (the first group is the third, the second group is the eighth, the third group is the thirteenth, and the fourth group is the eighteenth).

  In the above configuration, in each group of the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol or the "BAR" symbol is disposed first, the "replay" symbol is disposed second, and the "red 7" symbol or "third" is disposed. The "cherry" symbol is arranged, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "watermelon" symbol is arranged fourth, and the "bell" symbol is arranged fifth. In this case, it is not necessary to prepare data which is made to correspond to all the symbols on the left reel 32L in a one-to-one correspondence as the slip table, and five symbols included in one group need to be prepared. On the other hand, it is sufficient to prepare the data set with the slip number corresponding to one to one.

  FIG. 27 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the slip table T1 used in the left reel 32L when the winning is made with IV = 4. The number of slips is set in the corresponding slip table T1 in a one-to-one correspondence with five kinds of symbol order information of “0” to “4” which are information set in lower 4 bits of the symbol management data ing. For example, since the slip number is set to "2" when the symbol order information is "0", the lower position which is a predetermined position is No. 0, No. 5, 5 If the left stop button 42 is operated in a situation where one of the 10 and 15 symbols is present, the 2nd, 7th, 12 or 17 symbols will finally stop in the lower stage Do. In this case, when the symbol No. 7 or 17 stops in the lower part, it is possible to establish the first watermelon winning corresponding to the winning combination data of IV = 4 at the position on the main line ML in the left reel 32L When the watermelon symbol stops and the second or twelfth symbol stops at the lower end, the "LUCKY" symbol stops at the position on the main line ML in the left reel 32L as an alternative symbol of the "watermelon" symbol. Also, for example, since the slip number when symbol order information is “3” is set to “4”, the third and eighth in the lower position which is a predetermined position when IV = 4 has been won If the left stop button 42 is operated in a situation where any of the No. 13, No. 13 and No. 18 symbols is present, the No. 7, 12, 17 or 2 symbols will be final in the lower part To stop. In this case, when the symbol No. 7 or 17 stops in the lower part, it is possible to establish the first watermelon winning corresponding to the winning combination data of IV = 4 at the position on the main line ML in the left reel 32L When the watermelon symbol stops and the second or twelfth symbol stops at the lower end, the "LUCKY" symbol stops at the position on the main line ML in the left reel 32L as an alternative symbol of the "watermelon" symbol. Thus, the data capacity of each slide table T1 is reduced by using the slide table T1 in which the slide number is set for only five symbols included in one group to all the groups. As a result, it becomes possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the slip table T1 in the main ROM 73.

  Specifically, for the middle reel 32M, there is one "watermelon" symbol in each group, but the "watermelon" symbol is the first in each group (0 for the first group, the second For example, it is arranged at No. 5 and No. 10 for the third group and No. 15 for the fourth group. In this case, although four "watermelon" symbols are present in the middle reel 32M, they exist between one "watermelon" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol arranged next to the winding direction. The number of symbols is 4 which is the maximum slip number. In addition, although there is one "bell" symbol in each group, the "bell" symbol is the fourth in each group (No. 3 for the first group, and No. 8 for the second group, third group) In the case of the fourth group and 18 in the case of the fourth group. In this case, although there will be four "bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, it exists between one "bell" symbol and the "bell" symbol arranged next to the winding direction. The number of symbols is 4 which is the maximum slip number. In addition, although one "replay" symbol exists in each group, the "replay" symbol is the fifth in each group (No. 4 for the first group, and No. 9 for the second group, third group) In the case of the fourth group and 19 in the case of the fourth group. In this case, there are four "Replay" symbols on the middle reel 32M, but they exist between one "Replay" symbol and the "Replay" symbol arranged next to the winding direction. The number of symbols is 4 which is the maximum slip number. In addition, there is one "White 7" symbol in the first group and the third group, and there is one "red 7" symbol in the second group and the fourth group. Are arranged second in the corresponding group (No. 1 for the first group, No. 6 for the second group, No. 11 for the third group, and No. 16 for the fourth group). In addition, one "BAR" symbol exists in the first group and the third group, and one "cherry" symbol exists in the second group and the fourth group, but these symbols correspond The third group (the first group is the second group, the second group is the seventh group, the third group is the twelfth group, and the fourth group is the seventeenth group).

  In the above configuration, in each group of middle reels 32M, the "watermelon" symbol is disposed first, the "white 7" symbol or the "red 7" symbol is disposed second, and the "BAR" symbol or "third" is disposed. The "Cherry" symbol is arranged, the "bell" symbol is arranged fourth, and the "replay" symbol is arranged fifth. In this case, it is not necessary to prepare data which is made to correspond to all the symbols of middle reel 32M in a one-to-one correspondence as the slip table, and five symbols included in one group need to be prepared. On the other hand, it is sufficient to prepare the data set with the slip number corresponding to one to one.

  FIG. 27 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the slip table T2 used in the middle reel 32M when the winning is made with IV = 4. The number of slips is set in the corresponding slip table T2 in a one-to-one correspondence with five kinds of symbol order information of "0" to "4" which are information set in lower 4 bits of the symbol management data ing. For example, since the slip number is set to “4” when the symbol order information is “0”, the number 0, the number 5 and the number “5” in the lower position which is a predetermined position when IV = 4 If the middle stop button 43 is operated in a situation where one of the 10 and 15 symbols is present, the 4th, 9th, 14th or 19th symbol finally stops in the lower stage Do. In this case, the “watermelon” symbol, which enables the establishment of the first watermelon prize corresponding to the winning combination data of IV = 4, is stopped at the position on the main line ML in the middle reel 32M. Also, for example, since the slip number when the symbol order information is “3” is set to “1”, the third and eighth in the lower position which is a predetermined position when IV = 4 has been won If the middle stop button 43 is operated in a situation where any of the No. 13, No. 13 and No. 18 symbols is present, the No. 4, 9, 14, or 19 symbols are final in the lower part To stop. In this case, the “watermelon” symbol, which enables the establishment of the first watermelon prize corresponding to the winning combination data of IV = 4, is stopped at the position on the main line ML in the middle reel 32M. Thus, the data capacity of each slip table T2 is reduced by using the slip table T2 in which the slip number is set for only five symbols included in one group to all the groups. As a result, it becomes possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the slip table T2 in the main ROM 73.

  Specifically, for the right reel 32R, one "replay" symbol exists in each group, but the "replay" symbol is the first in each group (0 in the case of the first group, and the second group) For example, it is arranged at No. 5 and No. 10 for the third group and No. 15 for the fourth group. In this case, although four "Replay" symbols are present on the right reel 32R, they exist between one "Replay" symbol and the "Replay" symbol arranged next to the winding direction. The number of symbols is 4 which is the maximum slip number. In addition, one "watermelon" symbol exists in each group, but the "watermelon" symbol is the fourth in each group (No. 3 for the first group, and No. 8 for the second group, third group) In the case of the fourth group and 18 in the case of the fourth group. In this case, although four "watermelon" symbols are present on the right reel 32R, they exist between one "watermelon" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol arranged next to the circulation direction. The number of symbols is 4 which is the maximum slip number. In addition, although one "bell" symbol exists in each group, the "bell" symbol is the fifth in each group (No. 4 for the first group, and No. 9 for the second group, the third group) In the case of the fourth group and 19 in the case of the fourth group. In this case, although four "bell" symbols are present on the right reel 32R, they exist between one "bell" symbol and the "bell" symbol arranged next to the winding direction. The number of symbols is 4 which is the maximum slip number. In addition, there is one "White 7" symbol in the first group and the third group, and there is one "red 7" symbol in the second group and the fourth group. Are arranged second in the corresponding group (No. 1 for the first group, No. 6 for the second group, No. 11 for the third group, and No. 16 for the fourth group). In addition, one "BAR" symbol exists in the first group and the third group, and one "cherry" symbol exists in the second group and the fourth group, but these symbols correspond The third group (the first group is the second group, the second group is the seventh group, the third group is the twelfth group, and the fourth group is the seventeenth group).

  In the above configuration, in each group of the right reel 32R, the "Replay" symbol is placed first, the "White 7" symbol or the "Red 7" symbol is placed second, and the "BAR" symbol or The "Cherry" pattern is arranged, the "watermelon" pattern is arranged fourth, and the "bell" pattern is arranged fifth. In this case, it is not necessary to prepare data set corresponding to the number of one to one correspondence of all the symbols of the right reel 32R as the slip table, and it is necessary to prepare five symbols included in one group On the other hand, it is sufficient to prepare the data set with the slip number corresponding to one to one.

  FIG. 27 (c) is an explanatory view for explaining the slip table T3 used in the right reel 32R when the winning is made with IV = 4. The number of slips is set in the corresponding slip table T3 in a one-to-one correspondence with five kinds of symbol order information of “0” to “4” which are information set in lower 4 bits of the symbol management data ing. For example, since the slip number is set to "2" when the symbol order information is "0", the lower position which is a predetermined position is No. 0, No. 5, 5 If the right stop button 44 is operated in a situation where one of the 10 and 15 symbols is present, the 2nd, 7th, 12 or 17 symbols finally stop in the lower part Do. In this case, the “watermelon” symbol, which enables establishment of the first watermelon prize corresponding to the winning combination data of IV = 4, is stopped at the position on the main line ML in the right reel 32R. Also, for example, since the slip number when symbol order information is “3” is set to “4”, the third and eighth in the lower position which is a predetermined position when IV = 4 has been won If the right stop button 44 is operated in a situation where one of the No. 13, No. 13 and No. 18 symbols is present, the No. 7, 12, 17 or 2 symbols will be final in the lower part To stop. In this case, the “watermelon” symbol, which enables establishment of the first watermelon prize corresponding to the winning combination data of IV = 4, is stopped at the position on the main line ML in the right reel 32R. Thus, the data capacity of each sliding table T3 is reduced by using the sliding table T3 in which the sliding number is set for only five symbols included in one group for all the groups. As a result, it becomes possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the slip table T3 in the main ROM 73.

  Returning to the description of the reel control process (FIG. 24), when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped (step S602: YES), the prize determination process is executed in step S616, and then the prize result command is displayed It is set as an output target to the MPU 82 (step S617). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the winning is established this time, and also includes data indicating the type of the winning when the winning is established.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process. In the prize determination process, first, the value of the symbol management counter 112 provided corresponding to the left reel 32L is grasped (step S901), and the value after the process of step S804 to step S809 is executed on the grasped value. Are compared with the symbol management data table 121 of the main ROM 73, thereby grasping the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML in the left reel 32L (step S902). Further, the value of the symbol management counter 112 provided corresponding to the middle reel 32M is grasped (step S903), and the value after the process of step S804 to step S809 is executed on the grasped value is used as the main ROM 73. By checking the symbol management data table 121, the type of symbol stopped on the main line ML in the middle reel 32M is grasped (step S904). Further, the value of the symbol management counter 112 provided corresponding to the right reel 32R is grasped (step S905), and the value after the process of step S804 to step S809 is executed on the grasped value is used as the main ROM 73. By checking the symbol management data table 121, the type of symbol stopped on the main line ML in the right reel 32R is grasped (step S906).

  Thereafter, for each symbol stopped and displayed on the main line ML in each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, 2-byte data set for each type of symbol is read from data for specific control described later in the main side ROM 73 . Thereafter, as logical operation processing of symbol combination, 2-byte data corresponding to symbol combination is performed by ANDing each 2-byte data grasped in each of step S902, step S904 and step S906 with bits in the same order. Data is derived (step S 907).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the 2-byte data derived in step S 907 corresponds to any winning data (step S 908). If an affirmative determination is made in step S908, it is determined whether or not the winning data corresponds to the winning combination selected in the lottery process (FIG. 12) at the start of the current game (step S909). When it corresponds to the winning combination (step S 909: YES), the winning correspondence processing is executed (step S 910). In the winning correspondence processing, if the number of the winning combination is a small winning combination, the number of medals to be paid out so as to enable medals or virtual medals to be given in the medal payout processing is a work area for specific control described later in the main side RAM 74 Set in the payout target counter provided in 74a. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process for executing an automatic insertion process (step S402) in the next start waiting process (FIG. 11) is executed.

  On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the winning combination (step S909: NO), an abnormality notification command is set as an output target to the effect MPU 82 (step S911). The effect side MPU 82 executes the abnormality notification corresponding to the unfair winning by the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by receiving the abnormality notification command. Thereafter, after the operation prohibition process is executed in step S912, the progress of the game is stopped by becoming an infinite loop. In the operation inhibiting process, the next timer interrupt process is inhibited, and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to “0” to turn off all the actuators connected to the output port. The operation inhibited state is canceled by executing the clear process (step S104).

<Effect of configuration regarding arrangement of step number>
As mentioned above, in order to specify the rotational position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the number of steps of the stepping motor 33 is assigned to each symbol and the number of steps assigned to each symbol is not the same. In the configuration, first to fourth groups are set by grouping five symbols continuous in the rotational direction of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R into one group, and the first to fourth groups are All correspond to the arrangement | sequence aspect of the said arrangement | sequence of the said pattern of the step number corresponding to the arrangement | sequence contained in the said group, It becomes the arrangement | sequence aspect identical. In this way, all symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be shared by commonly using the processing configuration for specifying the number of steps corresponding to the symbols included in one group for all the groups. It is possible to specify the number of steps corresponding to

  The symbol management data is set in each symbol, and the step assigned to the symbol existing in the predetermined position by referring only to the symbol order information set in the lower 4 bits of the symbol management data It becomes possible to specify the number. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the number of steps.

  In particular, the first symbol in each group, the third symbol and the fifth symbol have the lowest bit of symbol management data set to "0", and the second symbol and the fourth symbol are the lowest in symbol management data. The bit is "1". On the other hand, 26 steps are assigned to the first symbol, the third symbol and the fifth symbol, and 24 steps are assigned to the second symbol and the fourth symbol. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the number of steps allocated to the symbol existing at the predetermined position only by referring to the lowest bit of the symbol management data. Therefore, the processing configuration for specifying the number of steps can be simplified.

  In addition, since the number of symbols included in each group is the same, when the value of the lower 4 bits in the symbol management data of the symbols existing at the predetermined position is “4” in hexadecimal, it is next The symbol that will be present at the predetermined position is uniquely the symbol of the top of the next group. This makes it easy to manage symbols based on symbol management data.

  The number of symbols included in each group is a value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum slip number, and the arrangement order of "bell" symbols in each group is the same. Thereby, when it is in the condition which should stop a "bell" symbol at a predetermined position, the "bell" symbol can be stopped at a predetermined position regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. While being, it becomes possible to produce the superior effect which is already explained. The same applies to the "replay" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

  As for the symbols included in common to each group, the arrangement order of the symbols in each group is common to each group. In addition, for symbols not commonly included in each group, the arrangement order of the symbols in the group in which the symbol is included, and the array of alternative symbols corresponding to the symbol in the group in which the symbol is not included The order is the same. In such a configuration, the slip table T1 to T3 in which the slip number is set only for the five symbols included in one group is used for all the groups. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of each sliding table T1 to T3, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for storing the sliding tables T1 to T3 in the main ROM 73.

  The number of steps corresponding to each symbol is only two types of 26 steps and 24 steps. Thus, in a configuration in which the number of steps corresponding to each symbol is not the same, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the number of steps corresponding to each symbol.

  In each group, the symbols corresponding to 26 steps and the symbols corresponding to 24 steps are alternately arranged. This makes it possible to prevent the symbols corresponding to one of the number of steps from being collectively gathered locally.

  The type of phase excitation corresponding to the last step number in the case of 26 steps and the type of phase excitation corresponding to the last step number in the case of 24 steps are the same. Thereby, even if it is a case where any of symbols corresponding to 26 steps and symbols corresponding to 24 steps is stopped at a predetermined position, it is possible to make the type of phase excitation common in the stopped state. It becomes. Therefore, even if any symbol is stopped at a predetermined position, it is possible to make the phase excitation state of the stepping motor 33 common.

  Further, the type of phase excitation corresponding to the first step number in the case of 26 steps and the type of phase excitation corresponding to the first step number in the case of 24 steps are also the same. As a result, regardless of the symbol corresponding to 26 steps or the symbol corresponding to 24 steps, the type of phase excitation corresponding to the first step number becomes the common start type and corresponds to the last step number The type of phase excitation to be used is the common end type. Thereby, even if the symbols corresponding to the 26 step number and the symbols corresponding to the 24 step are arranged, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate at a constant speed, one step is performed every time the number of steps advances by one. It becomes possible to set it as the structure switched from one to the other among excitation and two-phase excitation.

  The difference between 26 steps and 24 steps is "2". This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while minimizing the difference between the 26 steps and the 24 steps.

  In the case where the table for acceleration used when accelerating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from the situation where the symbols corresponding to the 26 steps are stopped at predetermined positions, It is set corresponding to each of the cases where the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is to be started from the situation in which the symbols corresponding to the 24 steps are stopped at predetermined positions. Thus, when starting to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from the situation where the symbol corresponding to the 26 steps is stopped at the predetermined position, and from the situation where the symbol corresponding to the 24 steps is stopped at the predetermined position It becomes possible to perform acceleration control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in a manner corresponding to the case of starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  The stop table used when stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stops the symbol corresponding to the 26 steps at a predetermined position, and stops the symbol corresponding to the 24 steps at a predetermined position It is set corresponding to each of. Thereby, stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in a mode corresponding to each of the case where the symbol corresponding to 26 steps is stopped at a predetermined position and the symbol corresponding to 24 steps is stopped at a predetermined position. It will be possible to do.

<Alternative Form of Configuration Regarding Arrangement of Number of Steps>
(1) In the above embodiment, four groups of the first to fourth groups are present as a group in which the arrangement mode of the number of steps corresponding to the symbol is the same, but instead of this, two Groups may be present, three groups may be present, or five groups may be present, and six or more groups may be present. It is good also as composition. In this case, in order to make the number of symbols included in each group the same among the groups, the number of symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R divided by the number of symbols included in each group is 2 or more It should be an integer of

  (2) In at least one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the predetermined two groups among the first to fourth groups have the same arrangement mode of the number of steps corresponding to the symbols in the predetermined mode, and the predetermined The group different from the two groups may have a configuration in which the arrangement aspect of the number of steps corresponding to the symbol is different from the predetermined aspect. Even in this case, in the predetermined two groups, the arrangement aspect of the number of steps corresponding to the symbol is the same, and therefore, for the predetermined two groups, the identification of the number of steps corresponding to the symbol is common. It becomes possible to do by processing.

  (3) Instead of the configuration in which 26 steps and 24 steps are set as the number of steps corresponding to the symbol, another number of steps may be set. Further, instead of the configuration in which only two types of 26 steps and 24 steps are set as the number of steps corresponding to the symbol, the number of steps of three or more types may be set.

  (4) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which 26 steps and 24 steps are set alternately to the arrangement of symbols in each group, and the configuration in which 26 steps and 24 steps are not set alternately in each group It may be

  (5) Rotation data of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for deriving the slip number corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop results of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, etc. It may be configured to be created inside.

  Even in this case, only the data of the number of slips corresponding to the symbols included in one group and one-to-one is set as the data to be created, and is commonly used for each group It may be configured as This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data created during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  In addition, when creating data for deriving the number of slips, the priority data is 1 in the configuration in which priority data in which priority is set for stopping each symbol at a predetermined position is used. Only the data of the priority included in each group and the corresponding one-to-one pattern may be set, and may be commonly used for each group. As a result, the storage capacity for storing priority data in advance in the main ROM 73 can be reduced.

<Invalid period of stop operation>
Next, the invalid period of the next stop operation which is set when the stop command is issued to one reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

  First, the setting mode of the invalid period of the conventional stop operation will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 29 (a) shows a period in which the left reel 32L is rotating at a constant speed, FIG. 29 (b) shows a period in which the left reel 32L is stopped and controlled, and FIG. 29 (d) shows a period during which the middle reel 32M is rotating at a constant speed, and FIG. 29 (e) shows a period during which the middle reel 32M is stop-controlled. FIG. 29 (f) shows a stop operation timing. 29 (g) shows a period during which the right reel 32R is rotating at a constant speed, and FIG. 29 (h) shows a period during which the right reel 32R is stop-controlled. FIG. 29 (i) shows the stop operation timing of the right stop button 44, and FIG. 29 (j) shows the invalid period of the stop operation.

  As shown in FIG. 29C, the left stop button 42 is stopped at timing t1 at which all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating at a constant speed. In this case, the type of symbol to be finally stopped at the predetermined position based on the type of symbol existing at the predetermined position in the left reel 32L at the stop operation timing and the slip table corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination Is determined. Then, the timing at which the determined stop symbol can be stopped at a predetermined position at the timing of t2 causes the left reel 32L to stop as shown in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b). The control is started, and the stop of the left reel 32L is completed at the timing of t3. In this case, in the conventional configuration, the fixed invalid period (specifically, 207 msec) for invalidating the stopping operation is set at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 29 (j). Therefore, even if the stop of the left reel 32L is completed at the timing of t3, the fixed invalid period has not yet elapsed at the timing of t3, so the timing until the timing of t4, which is the timing after the timing of t3, is reached. The stop operation of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R is invalidated.

  After that, the middle stop button 43 is stopped as shown in FIG. In this case, the type of symbol to be finally stopped at the predetermined position based on the type of symbol existing at the predetermined position in the middle reel 32M and the slip table corresponding to the result of the lottery process at the stop operation timing Is determined. Then, by the timing at which the determined stop symbol can be stopped at a predetermined position at the timing of t6, the middle reel 32M is stopped as shown in FIG. 29 (d) and FIG. 29 (e). The control is started, and the stop of the middle reel 32M is completed at the timing of t7. In this case, the fixed invalid period (specifically, 207 msec) is set at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 29 (j), and even if the stop of the middle reel 32M is completed at the timing of t7, the t7 Since the fixed invalid period has not yet passed at the timing of t, the stop operation of the right reel 32R is invalidated until the timing of t9 which is the timing after the timing of t7. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29 (i), the timing is t8, which is later than the timing of t7 when the stop of the middle reel 32M is completed and which is earlier than the timing of t9 when the fixed ineffective period elapses. Although the stop button 44 is operated to stop, this stop operation is invalidated.

  Thereafter, at timing t10 which is a timing after timing at which the second fixed invalid period has elapsed, the stop operation of the right stop button 44 is executed again as shown in FIG. 29 (i). In this case, the type of symbol to be finally stopped at the predetermined position based on the type of symbol existing at the predetermined position on the right reel 32R at the stop operation timing and the slip table corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination Is determined. Then, the timing at which the determined stop symbol can be stopped at a predetermined position can be stopped at time t11, as shown in FIGS. 29 (g) and 29 (h), the right reel 32R is stopped. The control is started, and the stop of the right reel 32R is completed at the timing of t13. Further, although the fixed invalidation period (specifically, 207 msec) is set at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 29 (j), the fixed invalidation period passes at the timing of t12.

  In the case of the conventional configuration as described above, since the invalidation period of the stop operation is set as the fixed invalidation period, the fixed invalidation period elapses regardless of whether the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. The stop operation is invalidated until you do so. Then, the ineffective period will continue to be meaningless, which will be a factor that hinders the smooth progress of the game. Also, for example, the player who was thinking of stopping the left reel 32L for the first stop and the middle reel 32M for the second stop and stopping the right reel 32R at the third stop the middle stop button after the left reel 32L is completely stopped. The operation is invalidated by being in the fixed invalid period for the stop operation of the left reel 32L of the one operated 43, and the operation of the middle stop button 43 is followed by the operation of the right stop button 44 and the right stop button 44 If the operation of (1) is effectively accepted because the fixed invalid period has elapsed, the target of the second stop is unintentionally the right reel 32R. If such an event occurs during an ART state described later, for example, although the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order displayed on the image display device 63, the stopping is different from the stopping order. A stop command may be generated on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in order, and a fall from the second RT mode or the first RT mode may occur against the player's intention.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, the fixed invalid period as described above is not set. However, the maximum number that can be simultaneously excited in the stepping motor 33 of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is 10 phases in relation to the power supplied from the power supply device 54 to the main control device 70. As described above, when stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not performed, either one phase excitation or two phase excitation is performed on the stepping motor 33, while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are performed. In the stop control of the four-phase excitation for one stepping motor 33 is performed over a predetermined period. Then, when stop control is simultaneously performed on the three reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the number of simultaneous excitations becomes 12 phases larger than the maximum excitation number of 10 phases. Therefore, even if the fixed invalid period is not set, the period in which the stop operation is invalidated may occur so that the stop control is not simultaneously performed on the three reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is. Hereinafter, a processing configuration for performing such stop control will be described.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the valid operation determination process executed in step S605 in the reel control process (FIG. 24). The valid operation determination process is executed when any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated.

  First, it is determined whether "1" is set in one of the braking target flags provided in a work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74 (step S1001). The braking target flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that there exist reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which stop control start conditions are satisfied but stop control is not completed. The reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided in one-to-one correspondence.

  When one of the braking target flags is set to “1” (step S1001: YES), stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the braking target flags for which “1” is set is completed. It is determined whether or not (step S1002). If the stop control has been completed (step S1002: YES), the braking target flag corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop control has been completed is cleared to "0" (step S1003).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001, a negative determination is made in step S1002, or if the process of step S1003 is performed, it is in rotation and is the start standby target for stop control and the execution target for stop control. It is determined whether or not a stop operation has occurred for the non-reels 32L, 32M, 32R (step S1004). The situation where the start control of stop control is to be performed is after the stop command has been issued to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the rotational position of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R at which the stop command is issued is the slip number. It is a situation before it becomes a rotation position which can stop the stop design determined in relation to and at a predetermined position. In addition, with the situation where stop control is to be executed, it is possible to stop the stop symbol determined in relation to the slide number at a predetermined position, with the rotational position of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R where the stop command is generated. When the rotational position is as follows, stop control using the stop table is being performed.

  When a stop operation is performed on a reel 32L, 32M, 32R that is rotating and is not the start standby target for stop control and the execution target of stop control, the braking target flag for which "1" is set is 2 Whether or not there are two or more reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are targets for start / stop of stop control or targets for execution of stop control by determining whether or not there are more than one. Is determined (step S1005). If there are two or more reels 32L, 32M, 32R which are targets for start / stop of stop control or targets for execution of stop control (step S1005: YES), this does not generate a new stop command, and the main command is executed. The valid operation determination process ends. As a result, when the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R are targets for start standby of the stop control or targets for execution of the stop control, the stop operation for the remaining reels 32L, 32M, 32R is invalidated, It is possible to prevent the number of simultaneous excitations from exceeding 10 phases which is the maximum number of excitations.

  Incidentally, when stop control is performed on the two reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the maximum simultaneous excitation number for the two reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is eight phases. There are two phases for ten phases. Then, when stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not performed, either one phase excitation or two phase excitation is performed for the stepping motor 33, so for the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Even if stop control is performed simultaneously, it is possible to perform rotational drive control on the remaining one reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

  On the other hand, if the number of braking target flags for which "1" is set is less than two (step S1005: NO), the stop corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop operation has been newly performed this time The command flag is set to "1" (step S1006). Thus, by making an affirmative determination in step S606 in the reel control process (FIG. 24), stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop operation is started. In step S1007, "1" is set in the braking target flag corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop operation has been newly performed this time.

  An execution mode of the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by execution of the effective operation determination process as described above will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 31 (a) shows a period in which the left reel 32L is rotating at a constant speed, FIG. 31 (b) shows a period in which the left reel 32L is stop-controlled, and FIG. 31 (c) shows a period of the left stop button 42. 31 (d) shows a period during which the middle reel 32M is rotating at a constant speed, and FIG. 31 (e) shows a period during which the middle reel 32M is stop-controlled. 31 (g) shows a period during which the right reel 32R is rotating at a constant speed, and FIG. 31 (h) shows a period during which the right reel 32R is stop-controlled. 31 (i) shows the stop operation timing of the right stop button 44, and FIG. 31 (j) shows an invalid period of the stop operation.

  As shown in FIG. 31C, the left stop button 42 is stopped at timing t1 at which all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating at a constant speed. In this case, the type of symbol to be finally stopped at the predetermined position based on the type of symbol existing at the predetermined position in the left reel 32L at the stop operation timing and the slip table corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination Is determined. Then, the timing at which the determined stop symbol can be stopped at a predetermined position at time t2 causes the left reel 32L to stop as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b). Control is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, which is a situation where the stop control of the left reel 32L is being performed, the middle stop button 43 is operated to stop as shown in FIG. 31 (f). In this case, only one left reel 32L is the start standby target of the stop control or the execution target of the stop control. Therefore, processing for performing stop control on the middle reel 32M is also started. Specifically, based on the type of symbol existing at the predetermined position in the middle reel 32M at the timing of t3 and the slip table corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, the symbol finally stopped at the predetermined position The type is determined. Then, by the timing at which the determined stop symbol can be stopped at a predetermined position at the timing of t4, the middle reel 32M is stopped as shown in FIG. 31 (d) and FIG. 31 (e). Control is started.

  In this case, at the timing of t3, the left reel 32L is an execution target of the stop control, and the middle reel 32M is a start standby target of the stop control. That is, at the timing of t3, two or more braking target flags in which "1" is set are present. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31 (j), the invalid period of the stop operation is started at the timing of t3. Even if the right stop button 44 is operated during the ineffective period of this stop operation, the operation is treated as invalid.

  Thereafter, at time t5, the stop control of the left reel 32L is completed as shown in FIG. 31 (b). As a result, since only one reel 32L, 32M, 32R which is the start standby object of the stop control or the execution target of the stop control becomes one of the middle reels 32M, as shown in FIG. 31 (j) at the timing of t5. The invalidation period of the stop operation ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, which is the situation where the stop control of the middle reel 32M is being performed, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop as shown in FIG. 31 (i). In this case, only one middle reel 32M is the start standby object of the stop control or the execution target of the stop control. Therefore, processing for performing stop control on the right reel 32R is also started. Specifically, based on the type of symbol existing at the predetermined position on the right reel 32R at the timing of t6 and the slip table corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, the symbol finally stopped at the predetermined position The type is determined.

  Thereafter, at time t7, stop control of the middle reel 32M is completed as shown in FIG. 31 (e). Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (g) and FIG. 31 (h), by the timing at which it is possible to stop the stop symbol determined for the right reel 32R at a predetermined position at the subsequent timing of t8. Stop control of the right reel 32R is started. Then, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 31 (h), the stop control of the right reel 32R is completed.

  Here, in a configuration in which the stop operation is not invalidated unless the number of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which are targets for start / stop of the stop control or targets for execution of the stop control becomes two or more, the two reels 32L, 32M, When the stop operation is accepted for 32R, stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R whose stop operation timing is on the rear side is completed earlier than the reels 32L, 32M, 32R whose stop operation timing is on the front side Things can happen. The case where such a situation arises will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 31C, the left stop button 42 is stopped at timing t10 at which all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating at a constant speed. In this case, the type of symbol to be finally stopped at the predetermined position based on the type of symbol existing at the predetermined position in the left reel 32L at the stop operation timing and the slip table corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination Is determined. Specifically, "4" is selected as the slip number until starting the stop control, and the symbol corresponding to the slide number of "4" is determined as the stop symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31 (f), at the timing of t11, which is a situation where the stop symbol has not yet reached the predetermined position on the left reel 32L and the left reel 32L is the target of start control for stop control The middle stop button 43 is operated to stop. In this case, the type of symbol to be finally stopped at the predetermined position based on the type of symbol existing at the predetermined position in the middle reel 32M and the slip table corresponding to the result of the lottery process at the stop operation timing Is determined. Specifically, “1” is selected as the slip number until starting the stop control, and the symbol corresponding to the slip number of “1” is determined as the stop symbol. Further, since there are two or more reels 32L, 32M, 32R which are targets for start and stop of the stop control at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. Be done.

  After that, the stop symbol has not yet reached the predetermined position on the left reel 32L, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is predetermined at timing t12 at which the left reel 32L is a target for start and stop of stop control It is a timing that can be stopped at the position. As a result, as shown in FIG. 31 (d) and FIG. 31 (e), the stop control of the middle reel 32M is started at the timing of t12.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t13, which is a state in which the stop control of the middle reel 32M is being executed, it is a timing at which the stop symbol of the left reel 32L can be stopped at a predetermined position. As a result, at the timing of t13, stop control of the left reel 32L is started as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b).

  Thereafter, at timing t14, the stop control of the middle reel 32M is completed as shown in FIG. 31 (e). As a result, only one reel 32L, 32M, 32R which is the start standby object of the stop control or the execution target of the stop control becomes one of the left reel 32L, as shown in FIG. 31 (j) at the timing of t14. The invalidation period of the stop operation ends.

  Thereafter, at time t15 at which the stop control of the left reel 32L is being performed, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop as shown in FIG. 31 (i). In this case, only one left reel 32L is the start standby target of the stop control or the execution target of the stop control. Therefore, processing for performing stop control on the right reel 32R is also started. Specifically, based on the type of symbol existing at the predetermined position on the right reel 32R at the timing of t15 and the slip table corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, the symbol finally stopped at the predetermined position The type is determined. Then, "0" is selected as the slip number until starting the stop control, and the symbol existing at the predetermined position is determined as the stop symbol.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t16 in which the stop control of the left reel 32L is being performed, the stop control of the right reel 32R is started as shown in FIGS. 31 (g) and 31 (h). Then, the stop control of the left reel 32L is completed as shown in FIG. 31 (b) at the timing of t17, and the stop control of the right reel 32R is completed as shown in FIG. 31 (h) at the timing of t18.

<Effect of Execution of Valid Operation Determination Process>
According to the above configuration, when the stop operation is performed on one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the fixed invalid period as in the prior art is not set, but one reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Even in a situation where the stop control is a start standby object or a stop control execution target, the stop operation of the other reels 32L, 32M, 32R is treated as effective. As a result, it is possible to prevent occurrence of an event that the invalidation period of the stop operation is continued despite the completion of the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which is the execution target of the stop control. Become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the invalidation period of the stop operation from continuing meaninglessly, and it is possible to make the progress of the game based on the stop operation smooth.

  Even if one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the start standby object for stop control or the execution target of stop control, the stop operation of the other reels 32L, 32M, 32R is treated as effective. Thus, even if one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the start standby target for the stop control or the execution target of the stop control, the other reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the start standby target or the stop for the stop control It can be the target of control execution. As a result, it is possible to shorten the shortest period required to stop all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game, and it is possible to improve the game digesting efficiency.

  A stop operation is performed on another reel 32L, 32M, 32R in a situation where one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is a target for start and stop of stop control, and the other reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped When the start of control becomes a target for standby, when the latter number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R is smaller than the former number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the latter number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R is smaller. An event occurs in which one stops earlier than the former reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This makes it possible to create a situation where the order of the stop operations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the actual stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R do not match, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. Become.

  When there are two reels 32L, 32M, 32R which are targets for start / stop of stop control or targets for execution of stop control, the new stop operation for the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R is invalidated. Be done. Thereby, in the configuration in which the maximum number of simultaneously excitable stepping motors 33 of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is 10 phases in relation to the electric power supplied to the main controller 70, the number of simultaneous excitations is the maximum excitation It is possible to produce the above excellent effects without exceeding the number. That is, it is possible to produce the above-described excellent effects without intentionally increasing the power supplied to the main control device 70.

  When there are two reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which stop control has not been completed after the stop command is generated, the new stop operation for the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R is invalidated. Because of the configuration, whether there is a reel 32L, 32M, 32R for which stop control has not been completed after the stop command has been issued when specifying whether or not the stop operation is in a condition to invalidate the stop operation. It is only necessary to specify whether the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not targets of start of the stop control but are not targets of start of the stop control, and it is not necessary to specify whether the reels 32L, 32M, 32R exist. Therefore, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying whether or not the stop operation is invalidated.

<Alternative Form of Configuration Regarding Effective Operation Determination Processing>
<First Alternative Form of Effective Operation Determination Processing>
Next, a first alternative form of the valid operation determination process will be described. In the first alternative embodiment, the ineffective period of the stop operation is set so that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the order of the stop operation. Hereinafter, the structure which enables the setting of the said invalid period is demonstrated. In addition, the description is fundamentally abbreviate | omitted about the structure same as the said embodiment.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a valid operation determination process according to the first alternative embodiment. The valid operation determination process is executed in step S605 in the reel control process (FIG. 24) when any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated.

  First, it is determined whether "1" is set in one of the start standby period flags provided in the work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74 (step S1101). The start standby period flag is a timing at which the rotational position of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R which has generated the stop command and which has generated the stop command becomes the rotational position which makes it possible to stop the stop symbol at a predetermined position. It is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that the timing is earlier than that, and is provided on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in a one-to-one correspondence. When the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed, the larger the value of the slip number determined, the longer the period in which the start standby period flag is set to "1".

  When “1” is set in any start standby period flag (step S1101: YES), the stop symbols determined for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the start standby period flag are predetermined. It is determined whether stop control has been started for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by reaching the position where it can stop at the position (step S1102). When stop control according to the stop table (see FIG. 21B) is started for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the start standby period flag in which “1” is set, the process proceeds to step S1102. And make a positive decision. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the start waiting period flag corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which stop control has been started is cleared to "0" (step S1103).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, if a negative determination is made in step S1102, or if the process of step S1103 is performed, "1" is set in any braking target flag of the main RAM 74 or not. It is determined (step S1104). When one of the braking target flags is set to "1" (step S1104: YES), stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the control target flag for which "1" is set is completed. On the condition that the condition is set (step S1105: YES), the braking target flag is cleared to "0" (step S1106).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1104, if a negative determination is made in step S1105, or if the process of step S1106 is performed, the target is a target for starting and waiting for stop control and for which stop control is being executed. It is determined whether or not a stop operation has occurred for the non-reels 32L, 32M, 32R (step S1107). When the stop operation has occurred, it is determined whether or not one of the start standby period flags in the main RAM 74 is set to “1” to stop control of any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is determined whether or not it is a target of standby for start (step S1108). If one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the start standby target of the stop control (step S1108: YES), the present valid operation determination processing is ended without generating a new stop command. As a result, when one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the start standby target for the stop control, the stop operation for the remaining reels 32L, 32M, 32R is invalidated, so the reels are ordered according to the stop operation order. It is possible to stop 32L, 32M and 32R.

  If there are no reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are targets for standby for start of stop control (step S1108: NO), are two or more braking target flags for which “1” is set? It is determined whether or not there are two or more reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are targets for start / stop of stop control or targets for execution of stop control by determining whether or not there are (step S1109). ). If there are two or more reels 32L, 32M, 32R which are targets for start / stop of stop control or targets for execution of stop control (step S1109: YES), a new stop command is not generated, and the main stop is performed. The valid operation determination process ends. As a result, when the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R are targets for start standby of the stop control or targets for execution of the stop control, the stop operation for the remaining reels 32L, 32M, 32R is invalidated, It is possible to prevent the number of simultaneous excitations from exceeding 10 phases which is the maximum number of excitations.

  On the other hand, if the number of braking target flags for which "1" is set is less than two (step S1109: NO), the stop corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop operation has been newly performed this time The command flag is set to "1" (step S1110). Thus, by making an affirmative determination in step S606 in the reel control process (FIG. 24), stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop operation is started. Further, in step S1111, the start waiting period flag corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop operation has been newly performed this time is set to "1", and in step S1112, the reel 32L for which the stop operation has been newly performed this time , 32M, 32R are set to "1".

  An execution mode of stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by execution of the effective operation determination process as described above will be described with reference to a time chart of FIG. FIG. 33 (a) shows a period in which the left reel 32L is rotating at a constant speed, FIG. 33 (b) shows a period in which the left reel 32L is stopped and controlled, and FIG. FIG. 33 (d) shows a period during which the middle reel 32M is rotating at a constant speed, and FIG. 33 (e) shows a period during which the middle reel 32M is stop-controlled. Shows the stop operation timing of the middle stop button 43, FIG. 33 (g) shows a period in which the right reel 32R is rotating at a constant speed, and FIG. 33 (h) shows a period in which the right reel 32R is stop controlled. FIG. 33 (i) shows the stop operation timing of the right stop button 44, and FIG. 33 (j) shows the invalid period of the stop operation.

  As shown in FIG. 33C, the left stop button 42 is stopped at timing t1 at which all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating at a constant speed. In this case, the type of symbol to be finally stopped at the predetermined position based on the type of symbol existing at the predetermined position in the left reel 32L at the stop operation timing and the slip table corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination Is determined. Further, since the left reel 32L is a target for start and stop of the stop control at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 33 (j), the invalid period of the stop operation is started at the timing of the t1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (a) and FIG. 33 (b), by the timing at which the stop symbol of the left reel 32L determined at the timing of t1 can be stopped at a predetermined position at the timing of t2. Thus, stop control of the left reel 32L is started. In this case, since the left reel 32L is to be subjected to stop control from the start standby target for the stop control, the stop period of the stop operation ends at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 33 (j).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, which is a situation where the stop control of the left reel 32L is being performed, the middle stop button 43 is operated to stop as shown in FIG. 31 (f). In this case, only one left reel 32L is the start standby target of the stop control or the execution target of the stop control. Therefore, processing for performing stop control on the middle reel 32M is also started. Specifically, based on the type of symbol existing at the predetermined position in the middle reel 32M at the timing of t3 and the slip table corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, the symbol finally stopped at the predetermined position The type is determined. Then, by the timing at which the determined stop symbol can be stopped at a predetermined position at time t4, the middle reel 32M is stopped as shown in FIGS. 33 (d) and 33 (e). Control is started.

  In this case, the middle reel 32M is a start standby object for stop control at the timing of t3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33 (j), the ineffective period of the stop operation is started at the timing of t3. Even if the right stop button 44 is operated during the ineffective period of this stop operation, the operation is treated as invalid. Further, the stop control of the middle reel 32M is started at the timing of t4, but since the stop control on the left reel 32L is still being performed, the invalid period of the stop operation is continued even at the timing of t4. Ru.

  Thereafter, at time t5, the stop control of the left reel 32L is completed as shown in FIG. 31 (b). As a result, since only one reel 32L, 32M, 32R which is the start standby object of the stop control or the execution target of the stop control becomes one of the middle reels 32M, as shown in FIG. 33 (j) at the timing of t5. The invalidation period of the stop operation ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, which is the situation where the stop control of the middle reel 32M is being performed, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop as shown in FIG. 33 (i). In this case, only one middle reel 32M is the start standby object of the stop control or the execution target of the stop control. Therefore, processing for performing stop control on the right reel 32R is also started. Specifically, based on the type of symbol existing at the predetermined position on the right reel 32R at the timing of t6 and the slip table corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination, the symbol finally stopped at the predetermined position The type is determined.

  Thereafter, at time t7, the stop control of the middle reel 32M is completed as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (g) and FIG. 33 (h), the timing at which it is possible to stop the stop symbol determined for the right reel 32R at a predetermined position at the subsequent timing of t8. Stop control of the right reel 32R is started. Then, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 31 (h), the stop control of the right reel 32R is completed.

  According to the configuration of the first alternative embodiment as described above, stop control using the stop table with respect to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which are targets after the stop command has been generated and for which the stop command is generated In the start standby period which is the period until the start of the other reels 32, the stop operation of the other reels 32L, 32M, 32R is invalidated. As a result, even if the start waiting period can be varied for each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped in the order of the stop operation.

  Further, even in the configuration where the invalid period of the stop operation is set as described above, in the situation where one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the execution target of the stop control, the other reels 32L, 32M, 32R The stop operation is not invalidated. This makes it possible to shorten the shortest period required to stop all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game, even in the first alternative embodiment, and to increase the digesting efficiency of the game. It becomes possible.

<Second alternative form of effective operation determination processing>
Next, a second alternative form of the valid operation determination process will be described. In the second alternative embodiment, the invalid period of the stop operation is set even in a situation where there are two reels 32L, 32M, 32R which are targets for start / stop of the stop control or targets for execution of the stop control. In the case where the stop operation is performed on the remaining one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in that situation, the stop control is executed in all of the three reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop operation is treated as invalid provided that the periods can overlap. Hereinafter, the structure which enables the said invalidation is demonstrated. In addition, the description is fundamentally abbreviate | omitted about the structure same as the said embodiment.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a valid operation determination process according to the second alternative embodiment. The valid operation determination process is executed in step S605 in the reel control process (FIG. 24) when any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated.

  In steps S1201 to S1203, the same processes as steps S1001 to S1003 of the valid operation determination process (FIG. 30) in the above embodiment are executed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1201, when a negative determination is made in step S1202, or when the processing of step S1203 is performed, the target is a target for start standby for stop control and for execution of stop control while it is rotating. It is determined whether or not a stop operation has occurred for the non-reels 32L, 32M, 32R (step S1204). When the stop operation has occurred, it is determined whether or not there are two or more braking target flags for which “1” is set in the main RAM 74, to start standby control of the stop control or stop control. It is determined whether or not there are two or more reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are to be executed (step S1205).

  If there are less than two reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are subject to start standby for stop control or for which stop control is to be performed (step S1205: NO), reel 32L, for which a new stop operation has been performed this time The stop command flag corresponding to 32M, 32R is set to "1" (step S1208). As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S606 in the reel control processing (FIG. 24), and stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop operation is started. In step S1209, "1" is set to the braking target flag corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop operation has been newly performed this time.

  On the other hand, when there are two or more reels 32L, 32M, 32R which are targets for start / stop of stop control or targets for execution of stop control (step S1205: YES), stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R The execution period of is determined (step S1206). Specifically, with regard to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R (hereinafter, also referred to as reels under stop control) for which stop control has already been executed, the time required for the end of the stop control is grasped. The grasp of this time means the remaining use time of the stop table (FIG. 21 (b)) being read out to the reel under stop control, the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing until the use of the stop table is finished. Understand from the number of interrupts of In addition, for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R (hereinafter, also referred to as start standby reels) that are targets for start control of stop control, the types of symbols currently reaching a predetermined position and the rotation positions of the symbols While grasping from the step number counter 111 and the symbol management counter 112 corresponding to the reel in the start standby, the stop symbol of the reel in the start standby is grasped. Then, by grasping the time required for the stop symbol to reach the position where the stop symbol can be stopped using the grasped information, the time required for the start standby period of the stop control to be grasped Do. This time is the time required for the stop control to be started for the start waiting reel. Moreover, since the execution period of the stop control using the stop table (FIG. 21 (b)) is constant regardless of which reel 32L, 32M, 32R, start standby is realized by grasping the fixed time. Understand the time when the stop control ends for the middle reel.

  After each time is grasped as described above, it is judged whether or not the execution periods of the stop control in all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can overlap based on the grasped each time (step S1207). If the execution periods of the stop control in all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be overlapped (step S1207: YES), the effective operation determination process is ended without generating a new stop command. This makes it possible to prevent the number of simultaneous excitations from exceeding 10 phases which is the maximum number of excitations. If no situation occurs in which the execution periods of the stop control overlap in all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R (step S1207: NO), the stop corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the new stop operation has been performed this time The command flag is set to "1" (step S1208). As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S606 in the reel control processing (FIG. 24), and stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop operation is started. In step S1209, "1" is set to the braking target flag corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop operation has been newly performed this time.

  According to the configuration of the second alternative embodiment as described above, the start control of the stop control or the execution of the stop control is not performed unless the execution period of the stop control may overlap in all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Even if two or more target reels 32L, 32M, 32R exist, the stop operation for the remaining reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not invalidated. In this case, although the processing configuration is more complicated than the above embodiment and the first alternative embodiment in that it is necessary to execute the processing of step S1206 and step S1207, the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is invalidated. Period can be shortened.

<Third Alternative to Valid Operation Determination Processing>
Next, a third alternative form of the valid operation determination process will be described. In the third alternative embodiment, the maximum number that can be simultaneously excited in the stepping motor 33 of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is eight phases in relation to the power supplied from the power supply device 54 to the main control device 70. . On the other hand, when stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not performed, either one phase excitation or two phase excitation is performed on the stepping motor 33, and stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The four-phase excitation is performed for one stepping motor 33 for a predetermined period. Then, when stop control is simultaneously performed on two reels 32L, 32M, 32R while one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating, the number of simultaneous excitations is larger than eight phases which is the maximum number of excitations It becomes nine or more phases. Therefore, in order not to perform stop control simultaneously on the two reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a period in which the stop operation is invalidated can occur. Hereinafter, the structure which enables the setting of the said invalid period is demonstrated. In addition, the description is fundamentally abbreviate | omitted about the structure same as the said embodiment.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a valid operation determination process according to the third alternative embodiment. The valid operation determination process is executed in step S605 in the reel control process (FIG. 24) when any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated.

  First, it is determined whether "1" is set to any braking target flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1301). When one of the braking target flags is set to "1" (step S1301: YES), stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the braking target flags for which "1" is set is completed. It is determined whether or not (step S1302). If the stop control is completed (step S1302: YES), the braking target flag corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop control is completed is cleared to "0" (step S1303).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1301, a negative determination is made in step S1302, or if the process of step S1303 is performed, the object is being rotated and the start standby target for stop control and the execution target for stop control It is determined whether or not a stop operation has occurred for the non-reels 32L, 32M, 32R (step S1304). When the stop operation has occurred, it is determined whether or not one of the braking target flags in the main RAM 74 is set to “1”, so that the start control of the stop control or the execution target of the stop control is performed. It is determined whether or not one or more reels 32L, 32M, 32R are present (step S1305). If one or more reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which are targets for start / stop of stop control or targets for execution of stop control, exist (step S1305: YES), a new stop command is not generated, and the main stop is performed. The valid operation determination process ends. As a result, when one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the start standby target of the stop control or the execution target of the stop control, the stop operation for the remaining reels 32L, 32M, 32R is invalidated. It is possible to prevent the number of simultaneous excitations from exceeding eight phases which is the maximum number of excitations.

  On the other hand, when all the braking target flags are "0" (step S1305: NO), "1" is set to the stop command flag corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop operation was newly performed this time. (Step S1306). Thus, by making an affirmative determination in step S606 in the reel control process (FIG. 24), stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop operation is started. In step S1307, "1" is set in the braking target flag corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop operation has been newly performed this time.

  According to the configuration of the third alternative embodiment as described above, the maximum number that can be simultaneously excited in the stepping motor 33 of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in relation to the power supplied to the main control device 70 is eight phases. In a configuration, it is possible to shorten the minimum time required to stop all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game within the range in which the number of simultaneous excitations does not exceed the maximum number of excitations. It is possible to improve the efficiency.

<Alternate Embodiment of Configuration Regarding Effective Operation Determination Processing>
(1) The order of the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R matches the order in which the stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed, as in the case where the effective operation determination process (FIG. 30) in the above embodiment is executed. In a configuration that may not occur, such a mismatch between the order of the stop operation and the order of the stop completion is also performed as a configuration that is executed as an effect to represent the expectation for winning the BB combination or the transition to the ART state. Good. For example, when a mismatch between the order of the stop operation and the order of the stop completion occurs, the winning expectation of the BB combination or the transition expectation to the ART state may be higher than when the mismatch does not occur. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the mismatch occurs, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the configuration may be such that the mismatch may occur multiple times in one game, and the probability of winning the winning combination of BB or the transition to the ART state may increase as the number of occurrences of the mismatch increases. . As a result, not only the player pays attention to whether the non-match occurs or not, the player also pays attention to the number of times the non-match occurs in one game.

  (2) Instead of four-phase excitation, three-phase excitation may be performed at the time of stop control, or three-phase excitation may be performed in addition to four-phase excitation. In this case, in a configuration in which the number of phases that can be excited simultaneously is nine and the configuration is such that three-phase excitation is performed instead of four-phase excitation during stop control, three reels 32L, 32M, and 32R simultaneously. The configuration may be such that stop control can be performed.

  (3) One remaining rotating reel 32L, 32M in a situation where the number of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is two after the stop command is generated and the stop control by the four phase excitation is not completed , 32R, until one of the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for stop control by four-phase excitation is completed, the stop operation is Stop control by two-phase excitation is performed on the target reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and stop control of any one of the two reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are targets of stop control by four-phase excitation The stop control for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which is the target of stop control by two-phase excitation, may be switched from two-phase excitation to four-phase excitation when . This makes it possible to start the stop control for the remaining one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R early.

  (4) Four or more reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be provided. In this case, one-phase excitation or two-phase excitation is performed during acceleration and constant speed rotation, and four-phase excitation is performed during stop control, and the number of simultaneously excitable phases is twelve. In the configuration, in the situation where the stop control has not been completed for all four reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can simultaneously perform the stop control is two, and one In the situation where the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed, the number of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can perform the stop control simultaneously is three.

  (5) The driving means for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be a motor other than the stepping motor 33. Even in this case, the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R capable of simultaneously performing stop control may be set equal to or less than the number obtained by subtracting 1 from the total number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

<Correspondence processing at the end of the game>
Next, the processing at the end of the game executed in step S310 of the normal processing (FIG. 10) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the response processing at the end of the game, when it is in the winning state or BB state of any of the BB roles (step S1401: YES), processing for BB is executed (step S1402). In the processing for BB, if any BB role has been won, it is determined whether or not a BB prize corresponding to the BB role that has been won has occurred in the current game, and a BB prize is generated. If it is, the gaming state is shifted to the BB state by setting "1" to the BB state flag provided in the work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main side RAM 74. As a result, in the lottery process (FIG. 12) in the next and subsequent games, the BB lottery table is referred to. Further, by transmitting a command indicating transition to the BB state to the effect side MPU 82, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 start the effect for the BB state. When the BB state is shifted, the BB winning data is deleted from the main RAM 74 to cancel the BB winning state. Further, the same BB state is obtained regardless of whether the first BB winning or the second BB winning occurs.

  In the processing for BB in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the addition of gaming media has occurred in the current game, and when the provision of gaming media is occurring, a work area for specific control described later in the main RAM 74. The number of game media provided in the current game is added to the total grant number counter provided in 74a. Then, it is determined whether the value of the total grant number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the end reference number. If it is less than the value corresponding to the end reference number, the processing for BB is ended as it is. If it is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the end reference number, the BB state flag is ended by clearing "0" to the BB state flag of the main RAM 74. Also, by transmitting a command indicating that the BB state has ended to the rendering side MPU 82, the ending image is displayed on the image display device 63, and thereafter, for the BB state in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. End the production of.

  When the BB state ends, the lottery mode is the normal mode even if the lottery mode before the start of the BB state is any mode. In addition, when the BB state is started in the AT state, the ART preparation state processing described later is performed after the BB state ends regardless of the state before the start of the BB state. Incidentally, when transitioning to the BB state in the AT state, the value of the remaining ART execution counter described later is incremented by one in order to increase the number of executions of the ART state once.

  If neither of the BB winning state and BB state of any of the BB combination (step S1401: NO), and is not an AT state (step S1403: NO), RT mode transition processing (step S1404), transition chance management processing ( Step S1405) and the game number cancellation management process (step S1406) are executed. When the stop operation on the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first performed in the game in the state of neither BB state nor AT state, a notification indicating that the stop operation should be performed from the left reel 32L is executed. However, no penalty is imposed to limit the giving of benefits in subsequent games.

  In the RT mode transition process (step S1404), when it is specified that the first RT replay winning has occurred in the current game, the first RT mode is entered, and the second RT replay winning occurs in the current game. If it is determined that there is a switch to the second RT mode. In addition, in the transition process of the RT mode, when it is specified that the second fall replay winning combination has occurred in the current game, the transition to the first RT mode is made, and the first fall replay winning combination occurs in the current game If it is determined that there is a change to the normal mode.

  In the transition chance management process (step S1405), it is determined whether or not the current game is in the normal mode and one of index values IV = 4 to 6 is won in the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 12) . If it is determined that one of index values IV = 4 to 6 is won in the normal mode, a transition lottery process to the AT state is executed. The transition lottery process to the AT state is executed when the selection mode of the BB combination, the BB state, and the AT state are not any, and the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 is the normal mode. In the transition lottery process to the AT state, the AT transition lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is read out from the data for specific control described later in the main ROM 73 and for specific control described later in the main RAM 74 The value of the lottery counter periodically (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) is updated in the work area 74a, and the value of the lottery counter is collated with the AT transition lottery table. The AT transition lottery table is AT transition winning with a probability of 5% when it is elected with index value IV = 4, and AT transition winning with a probability of 10% when it is elected with index value IV = 5 In the case of winning with the index value IV = 6, the AT transition winning is set with a probability of 15%.

  When the AT transition is won in the transition lottery process to the AT state, “1” is set in the AT state counter provided in the work area 74 a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74. The AT state counter is a counter for specifying whether or not the main MPU 72 is in the AT state and, in the case of the AT state, for specifying the staying mode of the AT state. In the non-AT state, the value of the AT state counter is "0", and in the AT state, the value of the AT state counter is 1 or more. By setting “1” in the AT state counter, ART preparation state processing (step S1408) described later is executed in the next processing cycle in the corresponding processing at the end of the game.

  Further, when the AT transition is won in the transition lottery processing to the AT state, the lottery processing of the execution times of the AT state is executed. When the AT state is started, the number of continuing games for one execution is set in the ART game number counter provided in the work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74, and the value of the ART game number counter is “0 When it becomes “1”, the one execution cycle ends. In the lottery process of the execution times of the AT state, the number of execution times is determined by lottery. In the lottery process of the execution times of the AT state, the execution time lottery table is read out from the data for specific control described later in the main ROM 73, and periodically (for example, 1. time) in the work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74. The value of the lottery counter updated in 49 msec cycle is read out, and the value of the lottery counter is collated with the above-mentioned execution time lottery table. In the run times lottery table, one run time is selected with a probability of 50%, 2 run times are selected with a 30% probability, 3 run times are selected with a 15% probability, and 5 times Execution times of are set to be selected with a probability of 5%. The value of the execution time selected in the lottery process of the execution time of the AT state is set in a remaining ART execution counter provided in a work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74. The ART game number counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuing games remaining in one execution time of the ART state by the main MPU 72, and the remaining ART execution counter specifies the remaining execution times of the ART state by the main MPU 72 Is a counter to

  In addition, when it becomes AT transition winning in the transition lottery process to the AT state, it is not limited to the configuration in which transition to the AT state is performed in the game, and the AT to the AT state transition lottery process is performed. When the transition winning is achieved, the transition to the AT state may be performed after a predetermined number of prognostic games (for example, 32 games) are digested. In this case, in the respective games in a situation where the number of prognostic games is being measured, effects are produced by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 which can make the player expect the transition to the AT state. Thus, the player's expectation can be suitably enhanced.

  In the game number cancellation management process (step S1406), transition to the AT state is made when the game for the cancellation game number set when the AT state ends last time is digested without the occurrence of a new transition to the AT state Execute the process to That is, every time one game is completed, the value of the number of canceled games is decremented by one, and when the value of the remaining number of canceled games becomes "0", the AT status counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". . As a result, the ART preparation state process (step S1408) to be described later is executed in the next processing cycle in the handling process at the end of the game. When the AT state counter is set to "1", the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "1".

  If the value of the AT state counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, this means that it is in the AT state, so an affirmative determination is made in step S1403 and the process proceeds to step S1407. In step S1407, the value of the AT state counter is grasped, and processing corresponding to the grasped value is executed. Specifically, if the value of the AT state counter is "1", ART preparation state processing is executed (step S1408), and if the value of the AT state counter is "2", ART state processing is executed (step S1409) If the value of the AT state counter is “3”, ART end branch processing is executed (step S1410). When the process of step S1402 is executed, the process of step S1406 is executed, or the process of any of steps S1408 to S1410 is executed, the game end command is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 82 (step S1411). The game end command is a command for causing the effect MPU 82 to recognize that one game is ended, and the command is transmitted to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). Ru. Hereinafter, each process of step S1408 to step S1410 will be described.

  First, the ART preparation state process (step S1408) will be described.

  The ART preparation state is a state in which, when a transition possible condition to the ART state is established, the state is to stay before transitioning to the ART state. In the ART preparation state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for enabling the establishment of the bell winning when the index value IV = 1 to 3 is won on condition that the player is not in the penalty state. Is notified. Further, in the ART preparation state, it is determined that the player is elected in any of the index values IV = 9 to 12 (hereinafter referred to as a promotion target role) in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 13) or the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 15). When it becomes, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the first RT replay win or the second RT replay win (hereinafter, also referred to as a halt order for promotion occurrence) is informed. The transition to the ART state is made in the first RT mode and won in the promotion target role in a situation where ART preparation state processing or ART end branch processing is being executed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order for promotion occurrence. It occurs when it is operated and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing ART preparation state processing. In the ART preparation state process, it is determined whether a penalty event has occurred (step S1501). The penalty event includes that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R were not stopped in the stop order for the promotion occurrence when the player was elected to be promoted. In the ART preparation state, when the player is elected to be promoted, the image display apparatus 63 informs the stop order for the promotion occurrence, but the promotion order is for the promotion despite the notification being executed. An event in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped in the stop order is a penalty event.

  If a penalty event has occurred (step S1501: YES), a penalty flag provided in a work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1502). The penalty flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that a penalty event has occurred in the ART preparation state. When the penalty flag is set to “1”, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for enabling the establishment of the bell prize even if the index value IV is 1 to 3 is used. Not informed. The penalty flag is cleared to “0” when transitioning from the ART preparation state to the ART state.

  In the ART preparation state processing, when either index value IV = 4 to 6 is won in the current game (step S1503: YES) and the penalty flag of the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S1503) Step S1504: NO), an additional lottery process of the number of initial continuation games is executed (step S1505). In the initial continuation game number addition lottery process, it is determined whether to add the number of continuing games in the ART state when transitioning from the ART preparation state to the ART state, and when the addition is made, the addition game number is determined Do. In the initial continuation game number addition lottery process, the initial continuation game number addition lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is read out from the data for specific control to be described later in the main ROM 73 and The value of the lottery counter periodically (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) is updated in the specific control work area 74a to be described later, and the value of the lottery counter is added to the initial continuation game number added lottery table. Match. The initial continuation game number addition lottery table is set so that the probability that the addition will occur in the order of IV = 4 → IV = 5 → IV = 6 is high, and the number of expected acquisition games of the additional games increases in the order. It is done. If the addition win is made in the initial continuation game number addition lottery processing (step S1506: YES), the number of addition games selected in the addition lottery processing is set in a work area 74a for specific control in the main RAM 74 described later. It is added to the provided initial addition counter (step S1507). The initial superimposition counter is a counter for specifying by the main MPU 72 the amount of continuation of the number of continued games in the ART state when transitioning to the ART state.

  In the ART preparation state processing, when it is specified that the second RT replay winning has occurred in the current game (step S1508: YES), "2" is set in the AT state counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1509). As a result, the main MPU 72 executes ART state processing (step S1409) in the next processing cycle in the game end processing (FIG. 36), and the gaming state shifts from the ART preparation state to the ART state. Further, in order to set the lottery mode to the second RT mode, data setting of a work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74 is performed (step S1510). Thereafter, under the condition that the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 74 is “0” (step S1511: YES), the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S1512).

  In the ART preparation state process, another RT mode transition process is executed (step S1513). In the other RT mode transition processing, when it is identified that the first RT replay winning has occurred, the first RT mode is entered, and when it is identified that the first falling replay occurrence is identified, the ordinary RT mode is entered. When it is specified that the second fall repurchase winning has occurred, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode.

  Next, the ART state process (step S1409) in the game end process (FIG. 36) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the ART state processing, it is determined whether the current processing time is the processing time immediately after the transition from the ART preparation state or the ART end branch state to the ART state or not, so that the current processing time is the start timing of the ART state. It is determined whether there is any (step S1601). If it is the start timing of the ART state (step S1601: YES), processing for setting the number-of-ART game counter is executed (step S1602).

  In the process for setting the ART game number counter, if the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, the value of the initial addition counter of the main RAM 74 is added to the value of the ART game number counter. Thereby, when transitioning to the BB state in the middle of the ART state and transitioning to the ART state again after the end of the BB state, with respect to the number of continuing games remaining in the execution state of the ART state which is in the middle of the execution. An additional amount of the number of continuing games generated in the ART preparation state is added. On the other hand, in the process of setting to the ART game number counter, if the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 74 is “0”, after setting “50” which is the initial continuation game number in the ART game number counter, The value of the initial addition counter of the main RAM 74 is added to the value of the ART game number counter. As a result, when one execution of the ART state is newly started, an additional for the number of continuing games generated in the ART preparation state is added to the initial continuing game number in one execution of the ART state.

  In the ART state process, if the player has won the index value IV = 4 to 6 in the current game (step S1603: YES), the additional lottery process for the number of continuing games is executed (step S1604). In the continuation game number addition lottery process, it is determined whether or not to add the number of continued games in the ART state, and when the addition is performed, the number of added games is determined. In the continuation game number addition lottery process, the continuation game number addition lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is read out from the data for specific control described later in the main side ROM 73 and described later in the main side RAM 74 The value of the lottery counter periodically (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) updated in the specific control work area 74a is read, and the value of the lottery counter is collated with the continued lottery number addition lottery table. The continuation drawing number addition lottery table is set such that the probability that the addition will occur in the order of IV = 4 → IV = 5 → IV = 6 is high, and the number of expected acquisition games of the addition game increases in the order. ing. If it is determined that the additional game is won in the continuing game number additional lottery process (step S1605: YES), the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is added to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1606) .

  In the ART state process, the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S1607). Then, when the value of the ART game number counter after the one subtraction is "0" (step S1608: YES), the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main side RAM 74 is "0" and the normal mode is set. It is determined whether or not (step S1609). If the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more or it is not the normal mode (step S1609: NO), "3" is set in the AT state counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1610). As a result, the main MPU 72 executes ART termination branch processing (step S1410) in the next processing cycle in the response processing at the game end (FIG. 36), and the gaming state shifts from the ART state to the ART termination branch state . On the other hand, when the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0” and the normal mode is set (step S1609: YES), the AT state counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” (step S1611). This will end the AT state.

  In the ART state process, a transition process of the RT mode is executed (step S1612). In the transition process of the RT mode, when it is identified that the first RT replay winning has occurred, the first RT mode is entered, and when it is identified that the second RT replay winning is identified, the second RT mode is entered. When it is determined that the first fall re-play prize has occurred, the mode is shifted to the normal mode, and when it is specified that the second fall re-play prize has occurred, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode.

  Next, the ART end branch processing (step S1410) in the processing at the end of the game (FIG. 36) will be described.

  The ART end branch state is a gaming state in which the player stays when one execution cycle of the ART state ends. In the ART end branch state, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped to enable the establishment of the bell winning when the index value IV = 1 to 3 is won on condition that the player is not in the penalty state. The order is informed. Further, in the ART end branch state, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, the state is finally returned to the ART state, and even if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is "0", the ART state Can return to Here, since one transition is made to the ART end branch state when one execution of the ART state is ended, there is a high possibility that the lottery mode is in the second RT mode at the timing of transition to the ART end branch state. In this case, even if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the transition from the second RT mode to the first RT mode is once generated, and then the state of the ART state is synchronized with the transition to the second RT mode. A new run is started.

  Even in the ART end branch state, when the index value IV = 1 to 3 is won as described above, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for notifying the formation of the bell prize is informed It is advantageous for the player because In this case, even if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the user will stay in the ART end branch state at least until the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode. On the other hand, in the case of the second RT mode in the ART end branch state, the reels 32L, 32M, for avoiding the occurrence of the second fall replay prize even if winning the combination enabling the occurrence of the second fall replay play. The stop order of 32R is not notified. As a result, in the ART end branch state, if the player's prediction is made to hit and the occurrence of the second falling replay win is avoided, the ART end branch state can be continued. Therefore, it is possible to continue the ART termination branching state advantageous to the player by the player's own prediction, and to improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing ART end branch processing. In the ART end branch processing, it is determined whether a penalty event has occurred (step S1701). A penalty event is promoted if it is won in the promotion target combination (IV = 9 to 12 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 13) and IV = 9 to 12 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 15)) This includes that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped in the stop order for promotion occurrence, even though the stop order for generation is notified. In addition, when a penalty event is won in any of IV = 13 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 15), a fall is made despite the notification of the stopping order for fall prevention. It includes that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been stopped in the generation stop order.

  If a penalty event has occurred (step S1701: YES), a penalty flag provided in a work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1702). The penalty flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that a penalty event has occurred. When the penalty flag is set to “1”, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for enabling the establishment of the bell prize even if the index value IV is 1 to 3 is used. Not informed. The penalty flag is cleared to “0” when the ART end branch state is ended.

  In the ART end branch process, when it is specified that the second RT replay winning has occurred (step S1703: YES), if the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1704: YES), the remaining After the value of the ART execution counter is decremented by 1 (step S1705), "2" is set to the AT state counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1706). On the other hand, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is "0", "2" is set in the AT state counter without executing the process of step S1705 (step S1706). As a result, the main MPU 72 executes the ART state process (step S1409) in the next processing cycle in the game end process (FIG. 36), and the gaming state shifts from the ART end branch state to the ART state. Further, in order to set the lottery mode to the second RT mode, data setting of a work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74 is performed (step S1707).

  Here, as will be described later in detail, in the ART end branch state, when the winning combination enabling the occurrence of the second RT replay winning is won in a situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the second RT replay winning The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables generation is informed. As a result, in a situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the player is newly executed the ART state by winning the winning combination enabling the occurrence of the second RT replay winning in the first RT mode. Can be easily started. On the other hand, in the situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which enable the occurrence of the second RT replay prize even if winning the combination enabling the occurrence of the second RT replay prize. The stop order is not notified. In this case, the player predicts the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the occurrence of the second RT replay winning and performs the stopping operation, and the predicted stopping order allows the occurrence of the second RT replay winning In the case of the stop order, the second RT replay win occurs, and a new execution cycle of the ART state is started. That is, even if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, it is possible to start a new execution cycle of the ART state based on the prediction of the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the ART end branch process, when it is specified that the first fall replay prize winning has occurred (step S1708: YES), if the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1709: YES), The value of the AT state counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1710). This will end the AT state. Further, in order to set the lottery mode to the normal mode, data setting of a work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74 is performed (step S1711).

  Here, as will be described later in detail, in the ART end branch state, when the winning combination enabling the occurrence of the first fall replay replay prize is won in a situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the first fall replay The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R capable of avoiding the occurrence of winning is notified. As a result, in the situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, even if the player is elected to the combination that enables the occurrence of the first fall replay replay prize in the first RT mode, the player is It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence. In addition, even if the first fall replay prize has been generated under the situation, the ART termination branch state is continued. As a result, in a situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, even if the player makes a mistake in the first fall replay play, the ART end branch state can be continued. .

  On the other hand, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32L for avoiding the occurrence of the first fall replay prize even if winning the combination enabling the occurrence of the first fall replay prize under the condition that the value of the remaining ART execution counter is "0" The stop order of 32R is not notified. In this case, the player predicts the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to avoid the occurrence of the first fall replay prize, and performs the stop operation, and the predicted stop order is the occurrence of the first fall replay prize. If it is a stopping order that can be avoided, the first fall replay prize does not occur. As a result, in the ART end branch state, if the player's prediction is made to hit and the occurrence of the first falling replay win is avoided, the ART end branch state can be continued. Therefore, it is possible to continue the ART termination branching state advantageous to the player by the player's own prediction, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the ART end branch process, another RT mode transition process is executed (step S1712). In the other RT mode transition processing, when it is identified that the first RT replay winning has occurred, the first RT mode is entered, and when it is identified that the second falling replay winning occurrence is identified, the first RT mode is entered Let

<Notification control process>
Next, the notification control process executed in step S512 in the lottery process (FIG. 12) in the main MPU 72 will be described. In the notification control process, control for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed, and a combination that enables the occurrence of the first fall replay replay winning in the first RT mode or the occurrence of the second RT replay win is possible Execute control to notify that the winning combination has been won. In this case, in the notification control process, the command setting process for causing the image display device 63 to execute various notifications is performed, and when the setting process of the command is performed, the notification content instructed in the command is handled. The setting process for causing the special display unit 67 to perform the display is performed. Prior to the description of the specific processing content of the notification control processing, the special display unit 67 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 40A is a front view of the special display portion 67. FIG. In the special display portion 67, seven display segments 101 to 107 are provided. Each of the display segments 101 to 107 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and it is possible to turn on only one arbitrary display segment 101 to 107 by on / off control of the individual light sources. While being possible, the display segments 101-107 of arbitrary combinations can be made to light. The individual light sources all emit light of the same color, so the same color is displayed in each of the display segments 101 to 107, but the invention is not limited thereto. Different colors may be displayed in the display segments 101 to 107, or a plurality of colors may be displayed on each of the display segments 101 to 107. The first to seventh display segments 101 to 107 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 101 to 107 are arranged so as to be a so-called seven-segment display. As a result, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of display on the special display unit 67, such as the numbers “1” to “9” and the alphabet “H”. The special display unit 67 is not limited to the above-described configuration as a segment display, and can display a plurality of types of symbols, numbers, or characters, as long as it can display a liquid crystal display or an organic EL display. Other types of display devices such as devices, CRTs, dot matrices, etc. may be used.

  In the slot machine 10, as described above, when the index value IV = 1 to 3 is won, the order in which the stop instruction for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is generated becomes the predetermined stop order. Bell prize occurs in Further, when the lottery process (FIG. 12) is executed using the normal mode lottery table (FIGS. 13 and 14), the reel 32L is selected when the index value IV is selected to 9-12. , 32M, and 32R stop commands are generated in the predetermined stop order, the first RT replay winning is established, and the lottery process (FIG. 12) is performed using the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 15 and FIG. 16). ) Is executed, and in the case of winning by index value IV = 9 to 12, the second RT replay is performed by the order in which the stop command of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is generated being the predetermined stop order. A prize is awarded. When the lottery process (FIG. 12) is executed using the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 15 and FIG. 16), the reel is selected when the index value IV is one of 13 to 18 and it is won. Since the order in which the stop commands of 32L, 32M, and 32R are generated becomes the predetermined stop order, the normal replay winning is established, and in the other cases, the first fall replaying prize is established. Further, when the lottery process (FIG. 12) is executed using the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 17 and FIG. 18), the reel is selected when the index value IV = 9 to 14 is won. Since the order in which the stop commands of 32L, 32M, and 32R are generated becomes the predetermined stop order, the normal replay winning is established, and in the other cases, the second fall replaying winning is established.

  As described above, in the configuration in which winning modes are different according to the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop commands are generated, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be notified in the image display device 63 is The stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the second stop and the third stop are arbitrary, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop and the third stop A stopping order in which the type of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is arbitrary, and a stopping order in which the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the second stop and the third stop are arbitrary. A stop order in which one stop is the left reel 32L, a second stop is the middle reel 32M, and a third stop is the right reel 32R, and a first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is The stop order is the reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the stop order the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and The stop order is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The first stop is the right reel 32R, and the second stop is the left reel 32L. There is a stop order in which the middle reel 32M is present, and a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. There are nine types of stop orders in total.

  In addition, in the ART end branch state, it indicates that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode when it is elected by any of the index values IV = 9 to 14 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 17 and FIG. 18). Although the notification is performed by the image display device 63, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding the occurrence of the second falling replay winning is not notified. Also, in the ART end branch state, when the index value IV = 9 to 12 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIGS. 15 and 16) is won, the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main side RAM 74 If “0” is given, the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode is executed by the image display device 63, but the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for generating the second RT replay winning is notified I will not. In addition, in the ART end branch state, the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main side RAM 74 when it is elected by any of the index values IV = 13 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 15 and FIG. 16). Is 0, the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode is executed by the image display device 63, but the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped to avoid the occurrence of the first fall replay replay winning. The order is not informed.

  In the above-described configuration, the special display unit 67 performs display corresponding to the content notified by the image display device 63 in relation to the winning combination. The display contents of the special display portion 67 will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (b).

  The display contents of the special display unit 67 are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the notification contents of the above eight types of stop orders in the image display device 63, and the stop orders of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not notified It is set corresponding to the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode. Specifically, in response to the notification that the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is optional is performed by the image display device 63, the number "1" is set as the display content. The number "2" is set as the display content in response to the notification that the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest is optional is performed by the image display device 63. Is the right reel 32R, and the remaining is arbitrary. A number "3" is set as the display content corresponding to the notification on the image display device 63 indicating that the first stop is the left reel 32L. In response to the notification that the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R is performed by the image display device 63, the number "4" is set as the display content. First stop Corresponding to notification by the image display device 63 indicating that the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the number “5” is set as the display content And the notification indicating that the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R is made to correspond to the image display device 63 being performed. The indication "6" is set as the display content, and the image display 63 is informed that the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. And the number "7" is set as the display content corresponding to the event being performed, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The numeral "8" is set as the display content corresponding to the notification to be performed by the image display device 63, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third Corresponding to the notification that the stop is the left reel 32L is performed by the image display device 63, the numeral "9" is set as the display content, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified Although not displayed, the character "H" is set as the display content in response to the notification that the image display device 63 indicates that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode.

  By setting the display contents of the special display unit 67 as described above, the display contents of the special display unit 67 do not overlap between different types of notification contents in the image display device 63. This makes it possible to associate the display content of the special display unit 67 with the notification content in the image display device 63.

  Note that the display content of the special display unit 67 is not limited to a configuration in which the display content of the special display unit 67 corresponds to each of the above notification contents in the image display device 63. A plurality of types of display contents of the special display unit 67 may be set to correspond to all of them. Even in this case, it is possible to associate the display content of the special display unit 67 with the notification content in the image display device 63 by preventing the display content of the special display unit 67 from overlapping between different types of notification contents. It becomes.

  FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content in the image display device 63 and the display content in the special display section 67. FIG.

  When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 41 (a1), the same number as the number of stop operations necessary for the image display device 63 to end the game The unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and image display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in each of the unit display images G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 41 (a1) shows that the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The left unit display image G1 displays an image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, and the middle unit display image G2 displays an image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M. The right unit display image G3 displays an image “3” corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R.

  While the image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stopping order itself of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as described above, the special display unit 67 displays the above-mentioned reels as shown in FIG. 41 (a2). Display of "6" corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. That is, in the image display device 63, unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed and in the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each unit display image G1 to G3. While the corresponding image display is performed, the special display unit 67 displays a display unrelated to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, even if the display corresponding to the notification content of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed on the special display unit 67, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

  When it is informed that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified in the image display device 63 but it is notified that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode, as shown in FIG. 41 (b1) Although unit display images G1 to G3 of the same number as the number of stop operations required for ending are displayed, image display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in each unit display image G1 to G3. Absent. Specifically, an image of "?" Is displayed as the same image in each of the left unit display image G1, the middle unit display image G2, and the right unit display image G3. In addition to the unit display images G1 to G3, a character image G4 of "target" !! is displayed as an image indicating that it is a branch timing of the lottery mode.

  While the image indicating the branch timing of the lottery mode is displayed on the image display device 63 as described above, the branch timing of the lottery mode is displayed on the special display section 67 as shown in FIG. 41 (b2). The display of "H" corresponding to being is performed. The display of "H" does not correspond to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As described above, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified in the image display device 63, also in the special display section 67, a display is performed in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not specified. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the game content that causes the player to predict the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from being lost by the display content of the special display section 67.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 1, the display range of the special display unit 67 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63. This makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the special display section 67 as compared with the image display device 63. Further, the special display portion 67 is present on the opposite side of the image display device 63 with the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R between which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be viewed. As a result, the special display unit 67 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the image display device 63. This also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the special display unit 67.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the notification control process.

  In the notification control process, when the index value IV = 1 to 3 is won (step S1801: YES), the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, and the penalty flag of the main RAM 74 The first display data setting process is executed (step S1804) under the condition that the value of is “0” (step S1802: YES, step S1803: NO). In the setting process of the first display data, by referring to a display correspondence table provided as data for specific control, which will be described later, in the main side ROM 73, occurrence of bell winning can be made in the index value IV which has been won this time. Understand the type of data of the display content that corresponds to the stop order. Then, data of the display content of the recognized type is read from the display data storage area provided as an area for storing a part of data for specific control described later in the main ROM 73, and the data of the read display content The display control of the special display unit 67 is executed in accordance with. As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the occurrence of the bell winning is started on the special display portion 67.

  Thereafter, a notification execution command and a stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 82 (step S1805). The notification execution command is a command for causing the effect MPU 82 to recognize that the notification related to the winning combination should be performed in the current game, and the stop order command is the reels 32L, 32M, and to be notified in the current game. This is a command for causing the effect side MPU 82 to recognize the stop order of 32R. Only one type of notification execution command is set, and the same notification execution command is set as a transmission target regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. The stop order command is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the type of stop order to be notified by the image display device 63, and in step S1805 the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling generation of a bell prize. Is read out from the main ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S1805 are transmitted to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  In the notification control process, the case is won when the first RT replay winning combination is made possible or the second RT replay winning combination is made possible (step S1806: YES). If the value is “1” or “2” (step S1807: YES), the process of setting the first display data is executed (step S1808). In the setting process of the first display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, it is possible to generate the first RT replay winning if the winning combination enabling the occurrence of the first RT replay winning is won. The type of data of the display content corresponding to the stop order to be held is grasped, and if it is won by the combination that enables the occurrence of the second RT replay winning, it corresponds to the stop order enabling the occurrence of the second RT replay winning Understand the type of data displayed. Then, data of display contents of the recognized type is read out from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and display control of the special display section 67 is executed according to the data of the read display contents. As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which enables the occurrence of the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is started on the special display portion 67.

  Thereafter, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 82 (step S1809). Only one type of notification execution command is set as described above, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. With regard to the stop order command, among the first RT replay win and the second RT replay win, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the occurrence of the win for the side corresponding to the current winning combination It is read from the ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S1809 are transmitted to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  In the notification control process, the AT state counter of the main RAM 74 is selected when the player is selected to be a combination that enables the generation of the first fall replay prize or a combination that enables the generation of the second fall replay prize (step S1810: YES). If the value of is 2 or the value of the AT state counter is 1 and the second RT mode is not set (step S1811: YES, step S1812: NO), the first display data setting process is executed. (Step S1813). In the setting process of the first display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, if it is a winning combination that enables the occurrence of the first fall replay replay winning occurrence of the first fall replay replay winning It is possible to avoid the occurrence of the second fall replay replay if it is possible to grasp the type of data of the display content corresponding to the stop order that can be avoided and to win the combination that enables the occurrence of the second fall replay replay. Understand the type of data in the display content that corresponds to the order of stopping. Then, data of display contents of the recognized type is read out from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and display control of the special display section 67 is executed according to the data of the read display contents. As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started on the special display unit 67, which makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of the first falling replay winning or the second falling replay winning.

  Thereafter, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 82 (step S1814). Only one type of notification execution command is set as described above, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. With regard to the stop order command, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can prevent the occurrence of the winning side corresponding to the current winning combination among the first fall replay prize and the second fall replay prize. Are read from the main ROM 73 and set as transmission targets. The various commands set in step S1814 are transmitted to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). Incidentally, in the stop order command transmitted in this case, information of the stop order corresponding to the notification content of the special display unit 67 selected in step S 1813 is set.

  In addition, when the value of the AT state counter is “1”, it is an ART preparation state, and in the ART preparation state, when it is the second RT mode, it is won as the role that enables the generation of the second fall replay replay prize. Even if the stop order for avoiding the occurrence of the second fall replay prize is not notified, a trigger to shift to the first RT mode is generated when the ART preparation state is started in the second RT mode. It is possible to The transition from the ART preparation state to the ART state occurs when transitioning from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. Therefore, when the ART preparation state is started in the second RT mode, the transition to the first RT mode is performed once. It is possible to secure an opportunity to generate an opportunity for transition from the ART preparation state to the ART state.

  In the notification control process, when the value of the AT state counter of the main RAM 74 is "3", that is, when the ART end branch state (step S1815: YES), the notification control process corresponding to the branch is executed (step S1816). . The notification control process corresponding to the branch will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the player is elected to be a combination that enables the occurrence of the second fall replay prize (step S1901: YES), the process of setting the second display data is executed (step S1902). In the case of the ART end branch state, even if the player has won the role of enabling the occurrence of the second fall replay prize as already described, the stop order for avoiding the occurrence of the second fall replay prize is not notified. Therefore, in the setting process of the second display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified but corresponds to the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode. Understand the type of data of the displayed content. Then, data of display contents of the recognized type is read out from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and display control of the special display section 67 is executed according to the data of the read display contents. As a result, the display corresponding to the notification indicating that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not a notification but is the branch timing of the lottery mode is started on the special display unit 67.

  Thereafter, a notification execution command is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 82 (step S1903). Only one type of notification execution command is set as described above, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. The set notification execution command is transmitted to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). In this case, as described above, in the case of ART end branch state, even if the player has won the role of enabling the occurrence of the second fall replay as described above, the stop order that makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of the second fall replay Will not be reported. Therefore, the stop order command is not transmitted to the effect MPU 82.

  In the notification control process for branching, when the winning combination is made possible to enable the occurrence of the first fall replay winning (step S1904: YES), if the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1905 : YES), the first display data setting process is executed (step S1906). In the ART end branch state, as described above, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the first fall replay replay prize will be generated if the player is elected to the combination that enables the occurrence of the first fall replay replay prize. The stop order which makes it possible to avoid is informed. Therefore, in the setting process of the first display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, the type of data of the display contents corresponding to the stop order capable of avoiding the occurrence of the first fall replay win can be grasped. . Then, data of display contents of the recognized type is read out from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and display control of the special display section 67 is executed according to the data of the read display contents. As a result, the display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the occurrence of the first fall replay prize is started on the special display portion 67.

  Thereafter, a notification execution command and a stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 82 (step S1907). Only one type of notification execution command is set as described above, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. With regard to the stop order command, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the occurrence of the first fall replay prize winning is read from the main ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S1907 are transmitted to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). Incidentally, in the stop order command transmitted in this case, the information of the stop order corresponding to the notification content of the special display unit 67 selected in step S1906 is set.

  On the other hand, the second display data is displayed when the player is elected to be able to generate the first fall replay prize and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is "0" (step S1904: YES, step S1905: NO). Setting processing is executed (step S1908). In the case of ART end branch state, as described above, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, the occurrence of the first fall replay replay prize even if the player is elected to the combination that enables the occurrence of the first fall replay replay prize The order of stopping to be avoidable is not notified. Therefore, in the setting process of the second display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified but corresponds to the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode. Understand the type of data of the displayed content. Then, data of display contents of the recognized type is read out from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and display control of the special display section 67 is executed according to the data of the read display contents. As a result, the display corresponding to the notification indicating that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not a notification but is the branch timing of the lottery mode is started on the special display unit 67.

  Thereafter, a notification execution command is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 82 (step S1909). Only one type of notification execution command is set as described above, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. The set notification execution command is transmitted to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). In this case, as described above, in the case of ART end branch state and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, the player has won the role that enables the occurrence of the first fall replay replay prize as already described. Also, the stop order that makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of the first fall replay prize is not notified. Therefore, the stop order command is not transmitted to the effect MPU 82.

  In the notification control processing for branching, when the winning combination enabling the occurrence of the second RT replay winning is won (step S1910: YES), if the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1911: YES), the first display data setting process is executed (step S1912). In the ART end branch state, as described above, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the winning of the second RT replay winning combination is possible, and the occurrence of the second RT replay winning is possible The stopping order is notified. Therefore, in the process of setting the first display data, the type of data of the display content corresponding to the stop order enabling the occurrence of the second RT replay winning is grasped by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73. Then, data of display contents of the recognized type is read out from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and display control of the special display section 67 is executed according to the data of the read display contents. As a result, the display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the occurrence of the second RT replay winning is started on the special display portion 67.

  Thereafter, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 82 (step S1913). Only one type of notification execution command is set as described above, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. With regard to the stop order command, the stop order command corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the occurrence of the second RT replay winning is read from the main ROM 73 and set as a transmission target. The various commands set in step S1913 are transmitted to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  On the other hand, in the case where the winning combination enabling the occurrence of the second RT replay winning is won, and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is "0" (step S1910: YES, step S1911: NO), the second display data The setting process is executed (step S1914). In the ART end branch state, as described above, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, the occurrence of the second RT replay prize is possible even if the player is elected to the role of enabling the occurrence of the second RT replay prize. The order of stopping is not notified. Therefore, in the setting process of the second display data, by referring to the display correspondence table of the main ROM 73, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified but corresponds to the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode. Understand the type of data of the displayed content. Then, data of display contents of the recognized type is read out from the display data storage area of the main ROM 73, and display control of the special display section 67 is executed according to the data of the read display contents. As a result, the display corresponding to the notification indicating that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not a notification but is the branch timing of the lottery mode is started on the special display unit 67.

  Thereafter, a notification execution command is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 82 (step S1915). Only one type of notification execution command is set as described above, and the same notification execution command is set regardless of the notification content in the image display device 63. The set notification execution command is transmitted to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). In this case, as described above, in the case of ART end branch state and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, it is assumed that the player has won the role that enables the second RT replay winning as described above. Also, the stop order that enables the occurrence of the second RT replay winning is not notified. Therefore, the stop order command is not transmitted to the effect MPU 82.

  In addition, when winning the combination that enables the occurrence of the first RT replay winning, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more, it corresponds to the stop order enabling the occurrence of the first RT replay winning The display control of the special display unit 67 is executed so that the display contents are displayed, and the notification execution command and the stop execution command are transmitted to the effect MPU 82 so that the stop order is notified by the image display device 63. Set as.

  Next, the notification process executed by the effect side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The notification process is performed, for example, in a cycle of 4 msec.

  When both the notification execution command and the stop order command are received from the main side MPU 72 (step S 2001: YES), the image of the stop order of the reels 32 L, 32 M, 32 R corresponding to the stop order command is Data required for display is set (step S2002). However, at this timing, the image in the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is not displayed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the measurement counter provided in the effect side RAM 84 (step S2003). The notification delay period is set as a period shorter than an acceleration period until the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate and become constant speed rotation, and is set to 0.5 msec, for example. The value set in the measurement counter is subtracted each time the notification process is started.

  In the process for notification, only the notification execution command is received from the notification execution command and the stop order command from the main MPU 72, and the stop order command is not received in the monitoring period before and after the timing at which the notification execution command is received ( Step S2004: YES), setting the data necessary for displaying on the image display device 63 an image showing that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not informed but it is the branch timing of the lottery mode (step S2005). However, at this timing, an image indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode is not displayed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the measurement counter provided in the effect side RAM 84 (step S2006). The value corresponding to the notification delay period is the same as in the case of step S2003.

  In the notification process, when the notification delay period measured using the measurement counter of the effect side RAM 84 has elapsed (step S2007: YES), the notification start process is executed (step S2008). In the notification start process, when it is the timing when the notification delay period set in step S2003 has elapsed, the image display device 63 displays an image based on the data set in step S2002. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (a1), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is displayed on the image display device 63. On the other hand, in the notification start process, when it is the timing when the notification delay period set in step S2006 has elapsed, the image display device 63 displays an image based on the data set in step S2005. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (b1), the image display device 63 displays an image indicating that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified but is the branch timing of the lottery mode.

  In the process for notification, other processes are executed (step S2009). In the other processes, for example, when the game end command is received from the main MPU 72, the display of the image finally displayed on the image display device 63 in the game is ended and the image waiting for the start of the next game Start the display of. In this case, when the game end command is received in a state where the image notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed, the display of the image notifying the stop order is ended. When the game end command is received in the state where the image indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode is displayed, the display of the image is ended.

  Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 45, a situation in which notification of the relationship with the winning combination is performed in each of the special display portion 67 and the image display device 63 will be described. 45 (a) shows the rotation period of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, FIG. 45 (b) shows the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and FIG. 45 (c) relates to the winning combination in the special display portion 67. The execution period of the notification is shown, and FIG. 45 (d) shows the execution period of the notification regarding the winning combination in the image display device 63.

  At timing t1, rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started as shown in FIG. 45 (a), and an acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started as shown in FIG. 45 (b). Further, at timing t1, as shown in FIG. 45C, notification of the relationship with the winning combination is started in the special display section 67 based on direct display control by the main MPU 72.

  Thereafter, at timing t2, which is a timing in the middle of the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 45 (d), the image display device 63 receives a winning combination based on direct display control by the effect MPU 82. Notification of the relationship between That is, in the configuration in which the notification regarding the winning combination is performed not only in the image display device 63 but also in the special display unit 67, the notification regarding the winning combination is started in the special display unit 67 directly controlled by the main MPU 72 Later, the notification regarding the winning combination is started by the image display device 63 which is directly controlled by the effect MPU 82.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R ends as shown in FIG. 45 (b), and constant speed rotation is started in the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. After that, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped as shown in FIG. 45 (a) at the timing of t4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 45 (d), the notification on the winning combination in the image display device 63 is ended at the timing of the time t4. Thereafter, at time t5, as shown in FIG. 45C, the notification on the winning combination in the special display portion 67 is ended. Then, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is newly started as shown in FIG. However, the notification about the winning combination is not performed in the game.

  In the case of the above configuration, the image display device 63 is directly controlled by the effect MPU 82 after the timing at which the notification regarding the winning combination is started by the special display unit 67 which is directly controlled by the main MPU 72. The special display section 67 is directly controlled by the main MPU 72 after the notification of the winning combination in the image display device 63 directly controlled by the effect MPU 82 is started. The notification on the winning combination in is ended. That is, the period in which the notification on the winning combination is being performed by the image display device 63 is entirely included in the period in which the notification on the winning combination is being performed in the special display section 67. As a result, when the notification regarding the winning combination is executed in the image display device 63, the notification regarding the winning combination is surely executed in the special display portion 67, and the winning being performed in the image display device 63 In the case where confirmation as to whether or not the notification regarding the combination is due to the injustice is performed using the display content of the special display section 67, the confirmation can be performed at an arbitrary timing.

<Effect of Configuration on Special Display Unit 67>
When the main MPU 72 wins the prize by any of index values IV = 1 to 3 in the lottery process (FIG. 12), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling notification of the bell winning is notified. Thus, the player who has confirmed the notification can establish the bell winning by performing the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in accordance with the stop order. The same applies to the case of winning the first RT replay winning combination and the second RT replay winning combination, and the operation for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the notified stopping order. It is possible to establish a replay prize corresponding to the winning combination that has been won. In addition, when it is elected to the part that enables the occurrence of the second fall Replay winning, it is informed that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the second fall Replay winning The player who has confirmed the notification can avoid the establishment of the second fall replay winning by performing the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the stop order. This is the same as in the case of winning the combination that enables the occurrence of the first fall replay prize. In the configuration, notification of the stop order is performed by the image display device 63 based on the control of the effect MPU 82 when the player is elected to the predetermined supporting role that generates a predetermined winning by becoming the predetermined stop order as described above. With the configuration described above, even if the processing load for causing the image display device 63 to execute notification to increase the player's attention to the image display device 63 becomes high, the influence is exerted on the main side MPU 72. It will be possible to prevent this.

  However, in the configuration in which the notification of the stop order is executed by the image display device 63 based on the control of the effect side MPU 82, the communication path between the main side MPU 72 and the effect side MPU 82 and the effect side MPU 82 are fraudulent Thus, it is assumed that the image display device 63 attempts to illegally obtain a profit while making the notification of the stop order illegal. In this case, it is assumed that it is difficult for the game hall manager to understand that the fraudulent activity is being performed because the notification of the stop order is executed by the image display device 63. .

  On the other hand, not only notification of the stop order is executed by the image display device 63 controlled by the effect MPU 82, but also the stop of the notification target in the special display unit 67 directly controlled by the main MPU 72 Notification corresponding to the order is performed. Thus, when the notification of the stop order is performed in the image display device 63, the special display unit 67 also visually confirms whether the notification corresponding to the stop order of the notification target is being performed, as described above. It is possible to confirm whether or not the wrongdoing has taken place.

  In the case where the player has not won the predetermined corresponding combination in which the predetermined winning combination occurs due to the predetermined stop order, the notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination is not executed in the special display portion 67. This makes it possible to make the role of the special display unit 67 clear.

  When notification of the stop order is performed in the image display device 63, notification corresponding to the stop order of the notification target is performed in the special display unit 67. This makes it possible to check whether notification of the stop order being executed in the image display device 63 is normal or not each time notification of the stop order is performed.

  The notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 67 is carried out in a manner in which the player is more difficult to grasp the contents of the stop order being notified than the notification of the stop order in the image display device 63. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the image display device 63 in a configuration in which not only the image display device 63 but also the special display unit 67 is provided. Therefore, even if the notification mode in the special display section 67 is a simple mode, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

  The display range of the special display unit 67 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the image display device 63 in a configuration in which not only the image display device 63 but also the special display unit 67 is provided. Therefore, even if the notification mode in the special display unit 67 is a simple mode, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

  In a configuration in which a stop order command enabling execution of notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 82, the stop order command includes the result itself of the lottery process of the winning combination. I can not. Thereby, even if the communication path between the main side MPU 72 and the effect side MPU 82 is illegally accessed and the stop order command is illegally obtained, it is attempted to grasp the result of the lottery process of the winning combination from the stop order command. Can be disabled. Therefore, it is possible to substantially invalidate the fraudulent act by acquiring the stop order command.

  The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 and the determination of whether to execute the notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 67 are collectively performed in the main MPU 72. Thereby, even if the main MPU 72 and the rendering MPU 82 do not perform bi-directional communication, when notification of the stop order is executed by the image display device 63, the special display unit 67 corresponds to the stop order. It is possible to make notification be performed.

  In a configuration in which a plurality of types of notification of the stop order to be executed by the image display device 63 are set, the special display unit 67 performs the notification in a mode corresponding to the type of the notification of the stop order. As a result, even if there is a configuration in which a plurality of types of notification of stop order are set, the content of the notification of stop order corresponding to the current game is grasped by confirming the content of the notification in the special display section 67. It becomes possible.

  If notification of the stop order is not executed in the image display device 63 even if the player has won the predetermined supporting combination in which the predetermined winning combination occurs when the predetermined stop order is reached, the stop order is displayed in the special display section 67. The corresponding notification is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the stop order from being performed in the special display unit 67 in a situation where it is not preferable that the notification of the stop order is performed in the image display device 63.

  If notification of the stop order is not performed but an image indicating that the drawing mode branch timing is selected is displayed on the image display device 63, the notification corresponding to the stop order is not performed in the special display unit 67. This makes it possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the stop order from being performed in the special display unit 67 in a situation where it is not preferable that the notification of the stop order is performed in the image display device 63. Further, when an image indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode is displayed on the image display device 63, the display corresponding to the display content on the image display device 63 is not the notification corresponding to the stop order Is executed. Thereby, even if an image indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode is displayed on the image display device 63, it is displayed on the image display device 63 by confirming the special display portion 67. It is possible to confirm whether the image is correct or not.

  Notification of the stop order is started in the image display device 63 at a timing after the start of the notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 67. Thus, by confirming the special display section 67 at the timing when the notification of the stop order is started in the image display device 63, it is possible to confirm whether the notification of the stop order is normal or not. .

  Even if notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 is started after the timing at which the notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 67 is started, the stop in the image display device 63 during the invalidation period of the stop operation Notification of the order is started. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize the content of notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 before the stop operation is validated.

  After the notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 is ended, the notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 67 is ended. As a result, the notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 67 does not end before the notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 is finished. Therefore, the notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 is regular. It is possible to increase the opportunity to confirm whether it is a thing or not.

<Another form of notification control processing for branching>
Next, another mode of the notification control process corresponding to the branch will be described. In addition, the description is fundamentally abbreviate | omitted about the structure same as the said embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing a notification control process corresponding to a branch in this embodiment.

  If a winning combination enabling the occurrence of the second fall replay prize is won (step S2101: YES), a notification execution command is set as a transmission target to the effect MPU 82 (step S2102). In this case, in the case of ART end branch state, even if the player is elected to be able to generate the second fall replay prize, the stop order for avoiding the occurrence of the second fall replay prize is not notified. Therefore, the stop order command is not transmitted to the effect MPU 82. As a result, in the image display device 63, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode although it is not notified. Also, the notification regarding the winning combination is not executed in the special display section 67 this time.

  In the notification control processing for branching, when the winning combination is made possible to enable the occurrence of the first fall replay winning (step S2103: YES), if the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2104 : YES), the display data setting process is executed (step S2105). As a result, the display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the occurrence of the first fall replay prize is started on the special display portion 67. Thereafter, the notification execution command and the stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 82 (step S2106). As a result, in the image display device 63, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can prevent the occurrence of the first falling replay winning is notified.

  On the other hand, in the case of winning the combination that enables the occurrence of the first fall repurchase winning, the value of the remaining ART execution counter is "0" (step S2103: YES, step S2104: NO), the notification execution command It is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 82 (step S2107). In this case, in the case of ART end branch state and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, the first fall replay replay winning even if the winning combination enabling the occurrence of the first fall replay win is won. The stop order that makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of the problem is not notified. Therefore, the stop order command is not transmitted to the effect MPU 82. As a result, in the image display device 63, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode although it is not notified. Also, the notification regarding the winning combination is not executed in the special display section 67 this time.

  In the notification control process for branching, when the winning combination enabling the occurrence of the second RT replay winning is won (step S2108: YES), if the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2109: YES), the display data setting process is executed (step S2110). As a result, the display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the occurrence of the second RT replay winning is started on the special display portion 67. Thereafter, a notification execution command and a stop order command are set as transmission targets to the effect MPU 82 (step S2111). As a result, in the image display device 63, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the occurrence of the second RT replay winning is notified.

  On the other hand, in the case where the winning combination enabling the occurrence of the second RT replay winning is won and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is "0" (step S2108: YES, step S2109: NO), the notification execution command is produced It is set as a transmission target to the side MPU 82 (step S2112). In this case, if it is in the ART end branch state and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is “0”, the occurrence of the second RT replay prize even if it is won by the combination that enables the occurrence of the second RT replay prize There is no notification of the stopping order that allows Therefore, the stop order command is not transmitted to the effect MPU 82. As a result, in the image display device 63, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode although it is not notified. Also, the notification regarding the winning combination is not executed in the special display section 67 this time.

<Another Alternative Form of Configuration Regarding Special Display Unit 67>
(1) When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63 and when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified, it is notified that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode. There is no limitation to the configuration in which the display is performed in the special display unit 67 alone, and the display may be performed in the special display unit 67 also in other cases. For example, even in a situation where notification of the stop order and notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode are not performed in the image display device 63, a predetermined correspondence combination in which a predetermined winning occurs when the predetermined stop order is reached. When the player is elected, the special display unit 67 may be configured to perform notification corresponding thereto. Further, for example, in the case where notification that the notification of the stop order is not performed in the image display device 63 but notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode is performed, notification corresponding to the stop order is performed in the special display unit 67 It is also good. However, if notification is given in the special display section 67 in such a manner that the player can clearly specify the stop order in spite of the fact that the stop order is not notified in the image display device 63, any of the index values IV = 1 to 3, for example. If the player is elected, the bell winning will be established regardless of whether or not it is in the ART state. Therefore, it is preferable that the notification is performed in a mode in which it is difficult to specify the stop order when notification is performed by the special display unit 67 in such a situation.

  (2) When the notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is executed by the image display device 63 or the like based on the control of the effect MPU 82, the notification corresponding thereto is performed in the special display unit 67 as well. Good. For example, before all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R finish rotating, an image such as a character or character is displayed on the image display device 63 in a display color corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination in the game. , The display before the image is displayed, the timing simultaneous with the display timing of the image, or the timing after the image is displayed, the display corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the part of the game or The display corresponding to the display color may be executed on the special display unit 67. More specifically, when an image such as a blue character or character is displayed on the image display device 63 when the normal replay role is won, the corresponding blue display is displayed on the special display portion 67. If the first watermelon role or the second watermelon role is won, and an image such as a green character or character is displayed on the image display device 63, the corresponding green display is displayed. A configuration may be considered that is performed on the special display unit 67. Thereby, when the display color corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is notified by the image display device 63, the corresponding display is performed on the special display unit 67. The configuration may be applied to a slot machine in which the winning combination does not change according to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled by the effect MPU 82 The present invention may be applied to slot machines that are not configured to be notified based on the above.

  (3) The special display unit 67 may display something in each game regardless of the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. In this case, the notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination may be performed in the special display unit 67, but by checking the special display unit 67, the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is clearly understood by the player. Since it is not preferable to cause a drop, it is preferable that the notification be performed in a manner that makes it difficult to specify the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.

  (4) When notification of the stop order is performed in the image display device 63, notification corresponding to the stop order is performed in the special display unit 67, but when notification of the stop order is not performed in the image display device 63. In the special display unit 67, a display may be made such that the result of the lottery process of the winning combination can not be identified. For example, when notification of the stop order is not performed in the image display device 63, the display content of the special display unit 67 may be determined by lottery, and the display corresponding to the lottery result may be performed in the special display unit 67. . Thereby, when the notification of the stop order is performed in the image display device 63, the notification corresponding to the stop order is performed by the special display unit 67, while the notification of the stop order is not performed. It is possible to make the display content of the display unit 67 irregular. In this case, the function of the special display unit 67 is not easy for the player to understand, and it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the special display unit 67.

  (5) When the notification of the stop order is performed in the image display device 63 and when the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode is performed, the corresponding notification is performed in the special display unit 67, but In the case other than the above, the special display unit 67 may be configured to display such that the result of the lottery process of the winning combination can not be identified. For example, when the notification of the stop order and the notification indicating that it is the branch timing of the lottery mode are not performed in the image display device 63, the display content of the special display portion 67 is determined by lottery and the display corresponding to the lottery result May be performed in the special display unit 67.

  (6) When the operation power is supplied to the main MPU 72, the special display unit 67 may always display something. For example, in the case where the notification of the stop order is performed in the image display device 63 and in the game in which the notification indicating the branch timing of the lottery mode is performed, the corresponding notification is performed in the special display unit 67, Alternatively, a standby display may be displayed on the special display unit 67 to indicate that a standby is in progress. As a result, the special display is made as to whether or not any abnormality has occurred in the electrical path between the main MPU 72 and the special display unit 67, and whether or not the special display unit 67 has a malfunction. It becomes possible to do only by visually observing the part 67.

  (7) Although the period in which the notification of the stop order is executed in the image display device 63 is included in the period in which the notification corresponding to the stop order is performed in the special display unit 67, the present invention is limited thereto There is no possibility that at least a part of the period during which the notification of the stop order is being performed in the image display device 63 is not included in the period during which the notification corresponding to the stop order is being performed in the special display section 67. It may be For example, the notification of the stop order is started in the image display device 63 after the timing when the notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 67 is started, but the notification of the stop order is performed in the image display device 63 The notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 67 may be ended, or the notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 is started after the timing when the notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 67 is ended. The notification of the stop order may be started in the image display device 63 and the notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 67 may be started, and the notification may be special after the notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 is finished. Alternatively, the notification corresponding to the stop order in the display unit 67 may end, or the image display apparatus The notification corresponding to the stop order in the special display unit 67 is started after the notification of the stop order in 3 is started, and the stop in the special display unit 67 at a timing before the notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 ends. The notification corresponding to the order may end. The player pays attention to the special display unit 67 by shortening the period during which the notification corresponding to the stop order is performed in the special display unit 67 is shorter than the period during which the notification of the stop order is performed in the image display device 63. It is possible to reduce the degree.

  (8) The special display unit 67 may be provided in a display unit for notifying other information such as the credit display unit 65 or the number-of-grants display unit 66. For example, a section frame section in which the target display section, which is one of the credit display section 65 and the number-of-grants display section 66, divides the outer edge of the target display section, and notification light for reporting information of a notification target In the configuration including the unit, the special display unit 67 may be disposed at a position adjacent to the notification light emitting unit in the area partitioned by the division frame unit of the target display unit. In this case, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the special display portion 67.

  (9) A unit display unit as many as the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R affecting the winning result is set in the special display unit 67, and the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each unit display unit A corresponding display may be executed. In this case, also in the special display section 67, as in the case of the image display device 63, a notification is made that enables the player to clearly grasp the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  (10) A combination that enables the generation of the first RT replay winning combination, a combination that enables the generation of the second RT replay winning combination, a combination that enables the generation of the first falling replay winning combination, and a generation of the second falling fall replay winning combination With regard to at least one of the winning combinations, there is no occurrence of a replay winning that triggers a transition to the drawing mode corresponding to the case where the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a predetermined stopping order, but at least The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be configured to generate a replay winning which is a transition trigger of the lottery mode corresponding to a case where the stop operation timing for the rotational position becomes a predetermined operation timing. In this case, the player can recognize the stop operation timing in the image display device 63 in the case where the occurrence of the replay winning serving as a transition opportunity can be made possible or the occurrence of the replay winning concerned can be avoided for the winning combination. In the special display section 67, notification corresponding to the content of the notification is performed.

  (11) The device for executing notification of the stop mode by the control of the effect side MPU 82 is not limited to the image display device 63, and instead of or in addition to the image display device 63, notifies the stop mode The notification of the stop mode may be executed by controlling the dedicated light emitting unit for the effect side MPU 82 by the effect side MPU 82, or the notification of the stop mode may be executed by the speaker 62 being controlled by the effect side MPU 82 It is also good.

  (12) The configuration in which the main MPU 72 determines whether to execute the notification of the stop mode is not essential. It is not necessary to determine whether to execute the notification of the stop mode in each of the main MPU 72 and the effect MPU 82 It may be a configuration to be performed, or it may be a configuration in which it is determined in the effect side MPU 82 whether or not notification of the stop mode is to be performed. However, in the case of a configuration in which the effect MPU 82 determines whether to execute notification of the stop mode, it is necessary to transmit information on the determination result from the effect MPU 82 to the main MPU 72.

  (13) The display content in the special display section 67 corresponds one-to-one to the content of notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination performed by the image display device 63 or the like under the control of the effect MPU 82 The display content in the special display section 67 is not limited to the above configuration, but the content of one type of notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination performed by the image display device 63 etc. The configuration may be set.

  For example, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified by the image display device 63, the special display unit 67 displays a line corresponding to the type of the winning combination in the game. It may be a configuration to be In this case, even if the same stop order is notified by the image display device 63, the display contents on the special display section 67 differ depending on the type of the winning combination in the game.

  When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified by the image display device 63, one display content selected by lottery is selected from a plurality of types of display contents corresponding to the notification contents of the stop order. The selected display content may be displayed on the special display unit 67. Even in this case, even in the situation where the same stop order is notified by the image display device 63, the display contents in the special display section 67 can be different.

  According to each of the above configurations, it is difficult for the player to understand the content notified in the special display section 67. However, in order to make the display content of the special display unit 67 correspond to the content of notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination performed by the image display device 63 or the like under the control of the effect MPU 82 Display content that can be displayed on the special display unit 67 when notification is performed and display content that can be displayed on the special display unit 67 when notification different from the predetermined notification is performed in the image display device 63 Is preferably completely different.

  (14) In the special display section 67, a display corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination may be executed. In this case, the display contents in the special display unit 67 may correspond to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination on a one-on-one basis. Further, instead of the configuration, a plurality of types of display contents in the special display unit 67 may be set for each result of the lottery process of the winning combination. As a result, while the display corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is performed in the special display unit 67, even if the special display unit 67 is confirmed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. However, in order to make the display content of the special display unit 67 correspond to the result of the lottery process of the combination, the display content that can be displayed on the special display unit 67 when the result of the lottery process of the combination is a predetermined result; It is preferable that the display contents that can be displayed on the special display unit 67 be completely different from each other when the result of the lottery process is a result different from the predetermined result. In this case, the types of display contents of the special display section 67 set for the result of one of the lottery processes for the combination may be the same as or different from the results of the lottery process for any of the combinations. The number may be different depending on the result of the lottery process.

  The configuration may be applied to a slot machine in which the winning combination does not change according to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled by the effect MPU 82 The present invention may be applied to slot machines that are not configured to be notified based on the above. For example, the configuration may be applied to a configuration in which a notification corresponding to the type of winning combination that can be won by the image display device 63 or the like is executed based on the control of the effect MPU 82.

  (15) When the display corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination is executed in the special display unit 67, the lottery of the combination in the special display unit 67 is performed after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. The display corresponding to the result of the process may be started. In this case, even if the special display portion 67 is confirmed in the situation where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, it is possible to prevent the result of the lottery process of the combination in the game from being specified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the lottery process of the winning combination is executed and before the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, the lottery process of the special combination of the special display portion 67 is performed. The display corresponding to the result may be started.

<Display content of ending image>
Next, an ending image displayed on the image display device 63 when the BB state ends will be described. 47 (a) to 47 (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the ending image displayed on the image display device 63. FIG.

  When the ending image is displayed as shown in FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (e), one of the images A to E is displayed on the image display device 63 as the ending base image X1, and the ending base is displayed. The character image X2 is displayed as it exists in front of the image X1. As the character image X2, the total number of game media provided to the player in the current BB state is displayed.

  In the ending base image X1, an image is displayed in which an individual image representing an animal or a non-animal such as a person, a cat, a fish, or a dog is present in front of a predetermined background image. For example, in the image A shown in FIG. 47A, a character image of a boy is displayed as an individual image displayed so as to be present in front of a predetermined background image. Further, for example, in the images B to E shown in FIGS. 47 (b) to 47 (e), the character image of the girl is displayed as an individual image displayed so as to be present in front of a predetermined background image. Ru.

  The first base image for displaying the image A on the character ROM 131 provided on the effect control board 81 as image data for displaying the ending base image X1, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. Data 132, second base image data 133 for displaying image B, third base image data 134 for displaying image C, fourth base image data 135 for displaying image D, image And fifth base image data 136 for displaying E. By using the first base image data 132 to display the ending base image X1, an image A as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 47 (a) is displayed on the image display device 63. Further, by using the second base image data 133 to display the ending base image X1, an image B as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 47 (b) is displayed on the image display device 63. Further, by using the third base image data 134 to display the ending base image X1, an image C as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 47C is displayed on the image display device 63. Further, by using the fourth base image data 135 to display the ending base image X1, an image D as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 47 (d) is displayed on the image display device 63. Further, by using the fifth base image data 136 to display the ending base image X1, an image E as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 47 (e) is displayed on the image display device 63. As shown in FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (e), these images A to E are displayed such that the type of the predetermined background image is different and exists in front of the predetermined background image. Types of individual images are different. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish which one of the images A to E is displayed as the ending base image X1.

  In the slot machine 10, the type of ending base image X1 displayed in the ending image is switched according to a predetermined order each time the BB state is executed, and each of images A to E is according to the predetermined order. If the display switching cycle has been completed once, the display switching cycle of a new cycle is started and each of the images A to E is once again according to the above-mentioned predetermined order. To be displayed one by one. Then, the display switching cycle is repeated.

  Specifically, when the clear process (step S104) is executed in the main process (FIG. 8) and the initialization of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the ending image in the BB state that occurs first after that is the ending base image X1 The image A is displayed as Thereafter, each time the BB state is executed, the type of the ending base image X1 is switched in the order of image B → image C → image D → image E → image A → image B →. This makes it possible to diversify the display mode of the ending image. In addition, a player who is interested in the predetermined ending base image X1 is expected to continue the game until the BB state in which the predetermined ending base image X1 is displayed, and further, the predetermined ending base image X1 is displayed. When X1 is displayed, it is expected that the game is continued until the BB state in which the predetermined ending base image X1 is displayed again.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the type of ending base image X1 is changed in accordance with a predetermined order, the setting process of the slot machine 10 is not changed when the clear process (step S104) of the main RAM 74 is not executed. In this case, even if the power supply of the slot machine 10 is shut off and the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 and the effect MPU 82 is stopped, the order is maintained.

  On the other hand, when the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S104), the above order is not maintained as the main RAM 74 is initialized. Specifically, regardless of the type of ending base image X1 displayed in the last BB state executed before main RAM 74 is initialized, after main RAM 74 is initialized. In the first BB state, the image A is displayed. In addition, even when the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed, the above order is not maintained. Specifically, after the setting value is changed regardless of the type of ending base image X1 displayed in the last BB state executed before the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed. In the first BB state, the image A is displayed. Thereby, it is confirmed that the image E is not displayed in the last BB state of the slot machine 10 in one business day of the gaming hall, and the image in the first BB state of the slot machine 10 in the next business day By confirming that A is displayed, it is possible to grasp that the setting value of the slot machine 10 may have been changed. In this case, the player who is paying attention to whether or not the setting value of the slot machine 10 has been changed thinks that he wants to confirm the last BB state of the slot machine 10 in one business day, and plays the game of the slot machine 10. It is expected to continue the game and to start playing the slot machine 10 early, considering that the first BB state of the slot machine 10 on the next business day is to be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of playing a game in the slot machine 10.

  The processing configuration for enabling the display of the ending image as described above will be described below. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing processing for BB executed by the main MPU 72. The processing for BB is executed in step S1402 in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 36).

  First, processing for BB start is executed (step S2201). In the processing for BB start, if it is a gaming state which is not a BB state and is in a state of being elected to any of the BB roles, has BB winnings corresponding to the BB roles that have been won in this game occurred? It is determined whether or not BB winning is occurring, and the gaming state is shifted to the BB state by setting "1" to the BB state flag of the main RAM 74. As a result, in the lottery process (FIG. 12) in the next and subsequent games, the BB lottery table is referred to. Further, by transmitting a command indicating transition to the BB state to the effect side MPU 82, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 start the effect for the BB state. When the BB state is shifted, the BB winning data is deleted from the main RAM 74 to cancel the BB winning state. Further, the same BB state is obtained regardless of whether the first BB winning or the second BB winning occurs.

  In the processing for BB, processing for BB progression is executed (step S2202). In the processing for BB progress, it is determined whether or not the addition of game media has occurred in the current game, and if the provision of game media has occurred, the total award number counter of the main RAM 74 is granted in the current game Add the number of played game media. Then, it is determined whether the value of the total grant number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the end reference number. The total grant number counter is cleared to “0” when the BB state is newly started. If the value of the total grant number counter is less than the value corresponding to the end reference number, the processing for BB progression is ended as it is. If the value of the total grant number counter is equal to or more than the value corresponding to the termination reference number, the BB status flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” to end the BB status, and specific control for the main RAM 74 described later. "1" is set in the BB state end flag provided in the work area 74a of

  In the processing for BB, when “1” is set in the BB state end flag of the main RAM 74, it is determined that the end condition of the BB state is satisfied (step S2203: YES), BB shown in steps S2204 to S2209. Execute the termination process. When an affirmative determination is made in step S 2203, the BB state end flag is cleared to “0”.

  In the BB end process, first, the value of the total grant number counter of the main RAM 74 is grasped (step S2204). Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the total number of game media provided to the player in the current BB state.

  Thereafter, the value of the end screen counter 113 provided in the work area 74a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74 is grasped (step S2205). The end screen counter 113 is a counter for specifying the type of the ending base image X1 displayed in the ending image in the BB state by the main MPU 72. The case where the value of the end screen counter 113 is “0” corresponds to the situation where the image A is displayed as the ending base image X1, and the case where the value of the end screen counter 113 is “1” is the ending base image X1. Corresponding to the situation where the image B is displayed, and the value of the end screen counter 113 is "2" corresponds to the situation where the image C is displayed as the ending base image X1, the end screen counter 113 The value of "3" corresponds to the situation where the image D is displayed as the ending base image X1, and the value of the end screen counter 113 is "4" corresponds to the image E as the ending base image X1. It corresponds to being in the condition to display. When the clear process (step S104) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the display target of the ending base image X1 in the next BB state becomes the image A because the value of the end screen counter 113 becomes "0".

  After that, the BB end command is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 82 (step S2206). The BB end command is a command for instructing the effect MPU 82 to display the ending image in the BB state. In the BB end command, information corresponding to the total grant number of game media grasped in step S2204 is set, and information corresponding to the value of the end screen counter 113 grasped in step S2205 is set. The BB end command set in step S2206 is transmitted to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). The processing content of the effect side MPU 82 when the BB end command is received will be described later.

  After setting the BB end command, the value of the end screen counter 113 is incremented by 1 (step S2207). If the value of the end screen counter 113 after the 1 addition is 5 or more (step S2208: YES), the value of the end screen counter 113 is cleared to "0" (step S2209). By executing the processing of step S2207 to step S2209, in the ending image in the next BB state, the ending base image X1 of the next display order is displayed for the ending base image X1 displayed in the current BB state It becomes.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the ending display control process executed by the effect side MPU 82. The ending display control process is executed in another process (step S2009) in the notification process (FIG. 44).

  When the BB end command is received (step S2301: YES), the total grant number of game media in the current BB state is grasped from the received BB end command (step S2302). Further, information corresponding to the value of the end screen counter 113 is read out from the received BB end command, and the type of the ending base image X1 corresponding to the read information is referred to by referring to the correspondence table stored in advance in the effect ROM 83. It grasps (step S2303).

  Thereafter, start setting processing of ending display is executed (step S2304). In the ending display start setting process, with the ending base image X1 of the type grasped in step S2303 displayed, the character image X2 of the total grant number grasped in step S2302 is displayed. An image display instruction is issued to the VDP of the effect control board 81. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM 131 and executes a drawing process in accordance with the image display instruction. As a result, an image as shown in any of FIGS. 47A to 47E is displayed on the image display device 63 as an ending image.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the winning probability setting process executed by the main MPU 72. The winning probability setting process is executed in step S105 in the main process (FIG. 8).

  First, the current setting value is separately stored in the register of the main MPU 72 as a reference setting value (step S2401). Thereafter, processing for changing the setting value is executed (step S2402). In the setting value changing process, the current setting value is displayed on the special display unit 67 while reading the current setting value on the condition that the setting key is inserted and turned ON. In this case, when the clear process of the main side RAM 74 (step S104) is executed, a display corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed on the special display unit 67 when the winning probability setting process starts, and the clear process (step S104). If not, the display corresponding to the set value in the state before the power shutoff is performed. Thereafter, each time the reset button 56 is operated, the set value is updated by 1, and the updated set value is displayed on the special display unit 67. When the reset button 56 is operated in a situation where the setting value is “setting 6”, the setting value is updated to “setting 1”. Then, when the ON operation of the setting key is canceled after the start lever 41 is operated, the process for changing the setting value is ended. In this case, the display of the setting value on the special display unit 67 is ended. Also, the setting value finally determined is stored in the main RAM 74.

  After executing the setting value changing process, it is determined whether the setting value has been changed (step S2403). Specifically, the reference setting value stored separately in the main MPU 72 register is compared with the current setting value stored in the main RAM 74, and if both values match, the setting value It is determined that the change has not been made, and if the two values do not match, it is determined that the set value has been changed.

  If it is determined that the setting value has been changed (step S 2403: NO), the value of the end screen counter 113 of the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” (step S 2404). Accordingly, when the setting value is changed, the image A is displayed in the next BB state regardless of the type of the ending base image X1 displayed in the previous BB state.

  Here, since the clear process (step S104) is executed before the winning probability setting process, the winning probability setting process is started when the clear process (step S104) is executed and the main RAM 74 is initialized. The setting value is "setting 1" at the time of being set. In this case, if the setting value is not changed from “setting 1” in the setting value changing process, it is determined in step S 2403 that the setting value changing has not occurred, and the process of step S 2404 is not executed. However, when the clear process (step S104) is executed, the value of the end screen counter 113 is cleared to "0" as described above. That is, the value of the end screen counter 113 is cleared to “0” regardless of whether the clear process of the main RAM 74 (step S104) is executed or the set value of the slot machine 10 is changed. The display target of the ending base image X1 in the state is the image A in any case. Therefore, even if the ending base image X1 of the last BB state in the present slot machine 10 of one business day and the ending base image X1 of the first BB state in the present slot machine 10 of the next business day are confirmed, the main side It becomes possible to make it impossible to grasp which one of the clearing process of the RAM 74 (step S104) and the change of the setting value of the slot machine 10 has been executed, and the state information of the slot machine 10 by the display content of the ending base image X1. It is possible to prevent the provision of

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the type of ending base image X1 is changed. If the BB state occurs at each of the timing t1 to t8, the process of clearing the main RAM 74 (step S104) and the change of the setting value of the slot machine 10 are performed in the middle of the timing t1 to t8. If not, the type of the ending base image X1 is switched according to a predetermined order each time the BB state occurs. In this case, even if the business day of the gaming hall is switched between the timing of t7 and the timing of t8, the image B is displayed as the ending base image X1 at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 51 (a). At timing t8, the image C set as the next order of the image B is displayed as the ending base image X1.

  On the other hand, when the clearing process of the main RAM 74 (step S104) or the change of the setting value of the slot machine 10 is performed between the timing of t7 and the timing of t8, t7 as shown in FIG. 51 (b). Although the image B is displayed as the ending base image X1 at the timing of t, not the image C but the image A is displayed as the ending base image X1 at the timing of t8.

<Effect of Configuration on Display of Ending Base Image X1>
Not only the ending image is displayed in the BB state, but the type of the ending base image X1 to be displayed is sequentially changed each time the BB state occurs, so that the display mode of the ending image can be diversified. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, if the setting value to be used is changed, the type of ending base image X1 to be displayed in the BB state that occurs after the change is made is the ending base image before the change is performed It can be a type that violates the regularity of the X1 type of modification. As a result, the player who is paying attention to whether or not the setting value of the slot machine 10 has been changed thinks that he wants to confirm the last BB state of the slot machine 10 in one business day, and plays the game of the slot machine 10. It is expected to continue the game and to start playing the slot machine 10 early, considering that the first BB state of the slot machine 10 on the next business day is to be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of playing a game in the slot machine 10.

  When the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed, the display target of the ending base image X1 is the image A regardless of the type of the ending base image X1 in the BB state executed before the setting value is changed. It becomes. Thereby, even if the type of ending base image X1 in the last BB state of the slot machine 10 in the business day of the previous day is not confirmed, the ending base in the first BB state of the slot machine 10 in the business day of the day The player who confirms that the type of the image X1 is the image A predicts that the setting value of the slot machine 10 may be changed. Therefore, the ending base image in the first BB state of the slot machine 10 in the business day of the present day to the player who did not confirm the ending base image X1 in the last BB state of the slot machine 10 in the business day of the previous day. It becomes possible to make it possible to consider X1 to be confirmed, and it is possible to increase the chances of playing a game in the slot machine 10.

  Not only when the setting value to be used is changed, but also when the clear process (step S104) of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the type of ending base image X1 to be displayed in the BB state that occurs thereafter is the image A It becomes. As a result, the player who confirms that the type of ending base image X1 that is the display target in the BB state that occurs first in one business day is the image A changes the setting value of the use target as the trigger, and The game is played while predicting which of the clear processing (step S104) of the main RAM 74 is. Therefore, while making it easy to predict the presence or absence of the change of the setting value by confirming the type of the ending base image X1, it is possible not to be able to clearly understand that the setting value to be used has been changed. It becomes possible.

  The end screen counter 113 is provided in the main RAM 74, and the adjustment processing of the type of the ending base image X1 when changing the setting value is executed by the main MPU 72. Furthermore, at the time of displaying the ending image in the image display device 63, the main MPU 72 transmits to the effect MPU 82 a command in which information corresponding to the value of the end screen counter 113 is set regardless of the presence or absence of the change of the setting value. Information corresponding to the presence or absence of the change of the set value and the change degree of the set value is not transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the effect MPU 82. As a result, when changing the setting value, it is not necessary to transmit a command corresponding thereto from the main MPU 72 to the effecting MPU 82, and the action of trying to grasp the change of the setting value and the change degree of the setting value by illegal acquisition of the command. It is possible to block

<Another Embodiment of Configuration to Switch Ending Base Image X1>
First Alternative of Configuration for Switching Ending Base Image X1
Next, a first modification of the configuration for switching the ending base image X1 will be described. In the first alternative form, the type of ending base image X1 when the setting value is changed is the next to ending base image X1 displayed in the last BB state of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the previous day. Is a kind of order after a predetermined number different from the order of. Hereinafter, a configuration for switching the ending base image X1 will be described. In addition, the description is fundamentally abbreviate | omitted about the structure same as the said embodiment.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the winning probability setting process in the first alternative embodiment.

  First, the current setting value is separately stored in the register of the main MPU 72 as a reference setting value (step S2501). After that, the process for changing the set value is executed (step S2502) as in step S2402 of the winning probability setting process (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment.

  After the process for changing the setting value is performed, it is determined whether the setting value has been changed (step S2503). Specifically, the reference setting value stored separately in the main MPU 72 register is compared with the current setting value stored in the main RAM 74, and if both values match, the setting value It is determined that the change has not been made, and if the two values do not match, it is determined that the set value has been changed.

  If it is determined that the setting value has been changed (step S2503: NO), the addition process of the end screen counter 113 is executed (step S2504). In the addition process, “2” is set to a difference counter provided in a work area 74 a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74. Then, the process of adding 1 to the value of the end screen counter 113 and subtracting 1 of the value of the difference counter is repeated until the value of the difference counter becomes “0”. In this case, when the value of the end screen counter 113 after 1 addition becomes 5 or more, the value of the end screen counter 113 is cleared to “0”. By the addition process being performed, the value of the end screen counter 113 is changed by “2” to the switching order side of the type of the ending base image X1.

  According to the above configuration, when the setting value is changed, the ending of the next succeeding ending base image X1 to the ending base image X1 displayed in the previous BB state is not the ending of the next succeeding ending base image X1. The base image X1 will be displayed in the next BB state. That is, the type of the ending base image X1 when the setting value is changed is different from the following order with respect to the ending base image X1 displayed in the last BB state of the slot machine 10 on the previous business day. It becomes the kind of order after the predetermined number. In this case, the ending base image X1 displayed in the last BB state of the slot machine 10 in one business day of the gaming hall is confirmed and displayed in the first BB state of the slot machine 10 in the next business day By confirming the ending base image X1, it is possible to grasp that the setting value of the slot machine 10 may be changed. As a result, the player who is paying attention to whether or not the setting value of the slot machine 10 has been changed thinks that he wants to confirm the last BB state of the slot machine 10 in one business day, and plays the game of the slot machine 10. It is expected to continue the game and to start playing the slot machine 10 early, considering that the first BB state of the slot machine 10 on the next business day is to be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of playing a game in the slot machine 10.

  In addition, when the setting value is changed, the setting value is changed based on the type of ending base image X1 in the BB state performed before the setting value is changed. The type of ending base image X1 in the BB state is changed. Therefore, even if the ending base image X1 displayed in the first BB state of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the day is confirmed, it is impossible to predict at all whether or not the setting value has been changed. It is necessary to confirm the type of the ending base image X1 of the last BB state of the slot machine 10 on the business day and the first BB state of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the day. Therefore, it is possible to increase the importance of confirming the type of the ending base image X1 in both of these BB states.

  Here, since the clear process (step S104) is executed before the winning probability setting process, the winning probability setting process is started when the clear process (step S104) is executed and the main RAM 74 is initialized. The setting value is "setting 1" at the time of being set. In this case, when the setting value is not changed from “setting 1” in the setting value changing process, it is determined in step S2503 that the setting value has not been changed, and the process of step S2504 is not executed. However, when the clear process (step S104) is executed, the value of the end screen counter 113 is cleared to "0". That is, the ending base image is executed when the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S104) and the setting of the slot machine 10 is not changed after that and when the setting of the slot machine 10 is changed. The setting mode of the type of X1 will be different. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the targets to be focused on when predicting the set value by confirming the ending base image X1, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In particular, when the clear process (step S104) of the main side RAM 74 is executed and the setting value of the slot machine 10 is not changed after that, the setting value of the slot machine 10 is the "setting 1" with the lowest advantage. It becomes. Therefore, the process of clearing the main RAM 74 (step S104) is performed and the setting value of the slot machine 10 is not changed after that, the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed, and neither of them is available. It is important for the player to distinguish it from the situation. In this case, the process of clearing the main RAM 74 (step S104) is performed as described above, and the setting of the slot machine 10 is not changed after that and the setting of the slot machine 10 is changed. By making the setting mode of the type of ending base image X1 different, it is possible to increase the importance of confirming ending base image X1.

<Second another embodiment of configuration for switching ending base image X1>
Next, a second modification of the configuration for switching the ending base image X1 will be described. In the second alternative embodiment, when the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed, the type of ending base image X1 is changed in a mode corresponding to the difference of the setting value before and after the change. Hereinafter, a configuration for switching the ending base image X1 will be described. In addition, the description is fundamentally abbreviate | omitted about the structure same as the said embodiment.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the winning probability setting process in the second alternative embodiment.

  First, the current setting value is separately stored in the register of the main MPU 72 as a reference setting value (step S2601). After that, processing for changing the setting value is executed (step S2602) as in step S2402 of the winning probability setting process (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment.

  After executing the setting value changing process, it is determined whether the setting value has been changed (step S2603). Specifically, the reference setting value stored separately in the main MPU 72 register is compared with the current setting value stored in the main RAM 74, and if both values match, the setting value It is determined that the change has not been made, and if the two values do not match, it is determined that the set value has been changed.

  If it is determined that the setting value has been changed (step S2603: NO), the current setting value stored in the main RAM 74 is larger than the reference setting value separately stored in the main MPU 72 register It is determined whether there is any (step S2604). If the current setting value is larger than the reference setting value (step S2604: YES), the difference between the reference setting value and the current setting value is calculated (step S2605), and the difference addition process is executed. (Step S2606).

  In the difference addition process, the value of the difference calculated in step S2605 is set in a difference counter provided in a work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74. Then, the process of adding 1 to the value of the end screen counter 113 and subtracting 1 of the value of the difference counter is repeated until the value of the difference counter becomes “0”. In this case, when the value of the end screen counter 113 after 1 addition becomes 5 or more, the value of the end screen counter 113 is cleared to “0”. When the difference addition process is executed and the setting value is changed to a value higher than the reference setting value, the value of the end screen counter 113 is equal to the difference value to the normal switching order side of the ending base image X1. It will be changed.

  On the other hand, when the current setting value stored in the main RAM 74 is equal to or less than the reference setting value separately stored in the register of the main MPU 72 (step S2604: NO), the difference between the current setting value and the reference setting value. Are calculated (step S2607), and difference subtraction processing is executed (step S2608).

  In the difference subtraction process, the value of the difference calculated in step S2607 is set in the difference counter of the main RAM 74. Then, the process of subtracting one from the value of the end screen counter 113 and subtracting one from the value of the difference counter is repeated until the value of the difference counter becomes “0”. In this case, when the value of the end screen counter 113 after one subtraction is less than "0", the value of the end screen counter 113 is set to "4". When the subtraction processing of the difference is performed and the setting value lower than the reference setting value is changed, the value of the end screen counter 113 is equal to the normal switching order side of the ending base image X1 by the value of the difference. Will be changed to the opposite side.

  FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the switching mode of the ending base image X1 when the winning probability setting process is executed as described above.

  As shown in FIG. 54A, when the ending base image X1 in the last BB state of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the previous day is the image B, the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S104). If the setting value of the slot machine 10 is not changed otherwise, the ending base image X1 of the first BB state of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the day becomes the image C. On the other hand, if the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed to a setting value two steps higher than the setting value of the slot machine 10 without executing the clearing process of the main RAM 74 (step S104), the first BB of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the day is changed. The ending base image X1 of the state is an image E. The first BB of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the day is also set when the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed to a lower setting value by three steps without executing the clearing process (step S104) of the main side RAM 74. The ending base image X1 of the state is an image E.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the type of ending base image X1 is changed in a mode corresponding to the degree of change of the setting value. Thereby, the setting value is changed by confirming the type of the ending base image X1 of the last BB state of the slot machine 10 on the business day the day before and the first BB state of the slot machine 10 on the business day Not only it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of, it is possible to predict the degree of change of the set value. Therefore, it is possible to increase the importance of confirming the type of the ending base image X1 in both of these BB states.

  In addition, since the number of types of ending base image X1 to be sequentially switched is equal to or less than twice the number of types of setting values (specifically, “6”) − 1, When the type of the ending base image X1 displayed in the first BB state of the slot machine 10 is changed, the setting of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the previous day regardless of which type of ending base image X1 is selected. Both a change to a setpoint which is higher than the value and a change to a lower setpoint may be envisaged. As a result, even if the player predicted the presence or absence of the change of the set value and the change degree of the set value according to the content of the ending base image X1, the change to the set value higher than the business day of the previous day and the business day of the previous day It is not possible to grasp which of the changes to the lower setting value was made. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the provision of the state information of the slot machine 10 by the display content of the ending base image X1 from becoming excessive.

  Furthermore, when the clear process (step S104) of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the value of the end screen counter 113 is cleared to "0", and the display target of the ending base image X1 becomes the image A, and thereafter, When the setting value is changed to 0, the type of the display target of the ending base image X1 is changed based on the state in which the image A is the display target. As a result, factors to be predicted from the display content of the ending base image X1 are diversified, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (b), when the ending base image X1 in the last BB state of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the previous day is the image C, the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S104). If the setting value of the slot machine 10 is not changed otherwise, the ending base image X1 of the first BB state of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the day becomes the image D. If the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed to a setting value higher by five steps without executing the clearing process of the main RAM 74 (step S104), the first BB of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the day is changed. The ending base image X1 of the state is an image D. Also, even if the setting process of the slot machine 10 is changed to a setting value that is five steps lower than the main RAM 74 clearing process (step S104), the first BB of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the day is changed. The ending base image X1 of the state is an image D.

  Since the number of types of ending base images X1 to be sequentially switched in this way is less than or equal to "the number of types of setting values (specifically," 6 ")-1", this slot machine on the business day of the day The type of ending base image X1 displayed in the first BB state of 10 was the next type of ending base image X1 displayed in the last BB state of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the previous day In this case, the setting value of the slot machine 10 is maintained on the business day of the previous day, the setting value is set higher than the setting value of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the previous day, and the slot on the business day of the previous day Any change to a setting that is less than the setting of machine 10 may be envisaged. Thus, the ending base image X1 of the type corresponding to the next order of the normal switching order is displayed on the ending base image X1 displayed in the last BB state of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the previous day. Also, it is possible to leave the possibility of both a change to a setpoint to a higher level and a change to a setpoint to a lower level. Therefore, when the ending base image X1 of the type corresponding to the next order of the normal switching order is displayed with respect to the ending base image X1 displayed in the last BB state of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the previous day. The player can make various predictions to improve the interest of the game.

<Third Alternative to Configuration for Switching Ending Base Image X1>
Next, a third modification of the configuration for switching the ending base image X1 will be described. In the third alternative embodiment, when the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed, the ending base image X1 of a different type is changed between the case where the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed and the case where the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed. The type of the ending base image X1 is changed so that the display target is displayed. Hereinafter, a configuration for switching the ending base image X1 will be described. In addition, the description is fundamentally abbreviate | omitted about the structure same as the said embodiment.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a winning probability setting process in the third alternative embodiment.

  First, the current setting value is separately stored in the register of the main MPU 72 as a reference setting value (step S2701). After that, the process for changing the set value is executed (step S2702) as in step S2402 of the winning probability setting process (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment.

  After the process for changing the setting value is performed, it is determined whether the setting value has been changed (step S2703). Specifically, the reference setting value stored separately in the main MPU 72 register is compared with the current setting value stored in the main RAM 74, and if both values match, the setting value It is determined that the change has not been made, and if the two values do not match, it is determined that the set value has been changed.

  If it is determined that the setting value has been changed (step S2703: NO), the current setting value stored in the main RAM 74 is larger than the reference setting value separately stored in the main MPU 72 register It is determined whether there is any (step S2704). If the current set value is larger than the reference set value (step S2704: YES), an end screen counter addition process is executed (step S2705). In the addition process, “2” is set to a difference counter provided in a work area 74 a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74. Then, the process of adding 1 to the value of the end screen counter 113 and subtracting 1 of the value of the difference counter is repeated until the value of the difference counter becomes “0”. In this case, when the value of the end screen counter 113 after 1 addition becomes 5 or more, the value of the end screen counter 113 is cleared to “0”. By the addition processing being performed, the value of the end screen counter 113 is changed by “2” to the normal switching order side of the ending base image X1.

  On the other hand, if the current setting value is smaller than the reference setting value (step S2704: NO), the end screen counter subtraction processing is executed (step S2706). In the subtraction processing, “2” is set in a difference counter provided in a work area 74 a for specific control, which will be described later, in the main RAM 74. Then, the process of subtracting one from the value of the end screen counter 113 and subtracting one from the value of the difference counter is repeated until the value of the difference counter becomes “0”. In this case, when the value of the end screen counter 113 after one subtraction is less than "0", the value of the end screen counter 113 is set to "4". By the subtraction process being performed, the value of the end screen counter 113 is changed to the opposite side to the normal switching order side of the ending base image X1 by “2”.

  According to the above configuration, in addition to the effects of the first embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

  Different types of ending base images X1 are to be displayed depending on whether the setting value is changed to the high setting or the setting value is changed to the low setting. Thereby, the setting value is changed by confirming the type of the ending base image X1 of the last BB state of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the previous day and the first BB state of the slot machine 10 on the business day of the day. Not only it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of the parameter, it is possible to predict which one of the high-stage set value and the low-stage set value has been changed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the importance of confirming the type of the ending base image X1 in both of these BB states.

<Fourth Other Embodiment of Configuration to Switch Ending Base Image X1>
Next, a fourth modification of the configuration for switching the ending base image X1 will be described. In the fourth alternative embodiment, when the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed, the switching order of the ending base image X1 is changed. Hereinafter, a configuration for switching the ending base image X1 will be described. In addition, the description is fundamentally abbreviate | omitted about the structure same as the said embodiment.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the winning probability setting process in the fourth alternative embodiment.

  First, the current setting value is separately stored in the register of the main MPU 72 as a reference setting value (step S2801). After that, the process for changing the set value is executed (step S2802) as in step S2402 of the winning probability setting process (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment.

  After the process for changing the setting value is performed, it is determined whether the setting value has been changed (step S2803). Specifically, the reference setting value stored separately in the main MPU 72 register is compared with the current setting value stored in the main RAM 74, and if both values match, the setting value It is determined that the change has not been made, and if the two values do not match, it is determined that the set value has been changed.

  If it is determined that the setting value has been changed (step S2803: NO), whether or not "1" is set in the order flag provided in the work area 74a for specific control described later in the main RAM 74 or not. Is determined (step S2804). If "1" is set in the order flag (step S2804: YES), the order flag is cleared to "0" (step S2805), and if "1" is not set in the order flag (step S2) S2804: NO), the order flag is set to "1" (step S2806).

  Here, in the present embodiment, a first order and a second order are set as the switching order of the ending base image X1. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram for describing the first order and the second order. In the case of the first order, the ending base image X1 is changed in the order of image A → image B → image C → image D → image E → image A →... Whenever BB state occurs. In the case of the second order, the ending base image X1 is changed in the order of image E → image D → image C → image B → image A → image E →... Whenever BB state occurs. That is, the order of switching the ending base image X1 is reversed between the first order and the second order.

  Corresponding to this, in the case of the first order, the image A is selected when the value of the end screen counter 113 is “0”, and the image B is selected when the value of the end screen counter 113 is “1”. Is selected, the image C is selected when the value of the end screen counter 113 is "2", and the image D is selected when the value of the end screen counter 113 is "3", the value of the end screen counter 113 The image E is selected when “4” is. On the other hand, in the second order, the image E is selected when the value of the end screen counter 113 is "0", and the image D is selected when the value of the end screen counter 113 is "1". When the value of the end screen counter 113 is "2", the image C is selected, and when the value of the end screen counter 113 is "3", the image B is selected, and the value of the end screen counter 113 is "4". In the case of “1”, the image A is selected.

  The order flag is a flag for specifying the main MPU 72 as to which of the first order and the second order the switching order of the ending base image X1 is. When the value of the order flag is “0”, the first order is selected, and when the value of the order flag is “1”, the second order is selected. When the clear process (step S104) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the order flag is also cleared to "0". Therefore, when the clear process (step S104) of the main side RAM 74 is executed and the setting value is not changed after that, the value of the order flag is maintained at "0" and the ending base image X1 The switching order of is the first order.

  In the winning probability setting process (FIG. 56), when the process of step S2805 or step S2806 is executed, the correction process of the end screen counter 113 is executed (step S2807). In the correction process, even if the order flag is switched, the type of ending base image X1 displayed in the next BB state is the type of ending base image X1 that was originally set, that is, the business day of the previous day. When the ending order of the ending base image X1 set according to the switching order of the ending base image X1 displayed in the last BB state on the business day of the previous day, the kind of next order of the end screen counter Correct the value of 113. Specifically, if the value of the current end screen counter 113 is “0”, it is corrected to “4”, and if the value of the current end screen counter 113 is “1”, it is corrected to “3”. If the value of the end screen counter 113 is “2”, the state is maintained, and if the value of the current end screen counter 113 is “3”, it is corrected to “1”, and the value of the current end screen counter 113 If it is "4", correct it to "0". Thereby, even if the switching of the order flag is performed, the ending base image X1 of the type originally set is to be displayed in the next BB state.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a process for BB in the fourth alternative embodiment.

  In steps S2901 to S2902, the same process as step S2201 to step S2202 of the process for BB (FIG. 48) in the above embodiment is executed. Thereafter, under the condition that the end condition of the BB state is satisfied (step S2903: YES), the processing for BB end shown in steps S2904 to S2911 is executed.

  In the BB end process, first, the value of the total grant number counter of the main RAM 74 is grasped (step S2904). Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the total number of game media provided to the player in the current BB state.

  Thereafter, the value of the end screen counter 113 of the main RAM 74 is grasped (step S2905). Also, an image correspondence table corresponding to the value of the order flag in the main RAM 74 is read out from the data for specific control described later in the main ROM 73 (step S2906). The image correspondence table is set in one-to-one correspondence with possible values of the order flag, and in each image correspondence table, the kind of ending base image X1 is made in one-to-one correspondence with the value of the end screen counter 113. It is set. If the order flag is “0”, the image correspondence table in which the switching order of the ending base image X1 is the first order is read out, and if the order flag is “1”, the switching order of the ending base image X1 is the first Read out the image correspondence table in the two order. After that, the type of ending base image X1 corresponding to the value of the current end screen counter 113 is grasped from the order correspondence table read out in step S2906 (step S2907).

  After that, the BB end command is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 82 (step S2908). The BB end command is a command for instructing the effect MPU 82 to display the ending image in the BB state. In the BB end command, information corresponding to the total grant number of gaming media grasped in step S2904 is set, and information of the type of ending base image X1 grasped in step S2907 is set. The BB end command set in step S2908 is transmitted to the effect MPU 82 in the command output process (step S211) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). When the effect side MPU 82 receives the BB end command, the ending image is displayed on the image display device 63 as in the above embodiment. In this case, the ending base image X1 of the type set in the BB end command is to be displayed.

  After setting the BB end command, the value of the end screen counter 113 is incremented by 1 (step S2909). If the value of the end screen counter 113 after the one addition is 5 or more (step S2910: YES), the value of the end screen counter 113 is cleared to "0" (step S2911). As the ending base image X1 in the next BB state is executed by performing the processing of step S2909 to step S2911, the next in the switching order currently set for the ending base image X1 displayed in the current BB state An ending base image X1 of the order type is set.

  According to the above configuration, the switching order of the ending base image X1 is switched between the first order and the second order each time the setting value is changed. In this way, it is possible to predict whether the setting value has been changed by confirming both the switching order of ending base image X1 on the business day of the previous day and the switching order of ending base image X1 on the business day of the day. It becomes possible.

  In addition, even if the setting value is changed and the switching order of the ending base image X1 is changed, the type of ending base image X1 to be displayed first after that is set as the next display target before the setting value is changed. The correction process of the end screen counter 113 is executed so as to be the same as the type of the ending base image X1. In this case, even if the setting value is changed and the switching order of the ending base image X1 is changed, the type of ending base image X1 to be displayed first after that is the ending base image set on the business day of the previous day. The following type of order is applied to the ending base image X1 displayed in the last BB state on the business day of the previous day when the switching order of X1 is followed. As a result, it is confirmed whether the setting value has been changed only by confirming the ending base image X1 of the last BB state in the business day of the previous day and the ending base image X1 of the first BB state in the business day of the day. It is impossible to do so, and it is necessary to confirm the ending image of the BB state multiple times on each of two business days. Therefore, a player who is interested in whether or not the setting value has been changed can be played in the slot machine 10 for a long time.

Another Embodiment of Configuration for Switching Ending Base Image X1
(1) In order to allow the player to recognize the type of ending base image X1 displayed in the ending image in the next BB state separately from the ending base image X1 in the current BB state in the ending image in the BB state The notification image may be displayed. Thereby, the notification image in the last BB state of one business day is confirmed, and the type of the ending base image X1 of the first BB state in the next business day is confirmed to confirm the presence or absence of the change of the setting value. It is possible to predict. In this case, even if the change order of the type of ending base image X1 is not recognized, it is set by confirming each ending image of the last BB state of one business day and the first BB state of the next business day. It becomes possible to predict whether or not the value has been changed.

  (2) Even if the clear process (step S104) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the value of the end screen counter 113 may not be cleared to "0". For example, a rewritable ROM may be provided, and the end screen counter 113 may be set in the ROM or the value of the end screen counter 113 may be stored in the ROM when the operation power is stopped. In this case, if the setting value is not changed even if the clearing process (step S104) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the mode is executed first after that in the embodiment other than the fourth alternative embodiment of the above embodiments. The type of ending state base image X1 of the BB state to be performed is the next type of order with respect to the type of the ending state base image X1 of the BB state executed at the end of the previous business day. Further, in the fourth alternative embodiment, not only the value of the end screen counter 113 but also the value of the order flag is not cleared to "0" even if the clear process of the main RAM 74 (step S104) is executed. By doing this, if the setting value is not changed even if the clear process (step S104) of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the change order of the type of the ending base image X1 is maintained as it is. According to the above configuration, it becomes easy to predict whether the set value has been changed.

  (3) In a mode other than the fourth alternative form of the above embodiment, when the clear process (step S104) of the main side RAM 74 is executed, an ending base image of a type different from the case where the setting value is changed The configuration may be X1. In the fourth embodiment, when the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S104), the changing order of the ending base image X1 is different from that in the case where the setting value is changed. It is good also as composition. According to the above configuration, it becomes easy to predict whether the set value has been changed.

  (4) Even if the clear process (step S104) of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the set value may not be initialized, and the previous set value may be maintained. Further, in the configuration, the initialization of the setting value may be configured to require an operation different from the operation for executing the clear process (step S104) of the main RAM 74.

  (5) The number of types of the ending base image X1 is not limited to five, and may be four or less or six or more. In this case, since the number of types of ending base image X1 is three or more, it is possible to set the type of ending base image X1 after the change of the setting value not to follow the regularity of the change aspect so far. It becomes.

  The number of types of ending base image X1 may be equal to or greater than the number of types of setting values (specifically, "6"). When the setting value is changed by applying the configuration to the second alternative embodiment, the ending base image after the setting value change regardless of the difference between the setting values before and after the setting value change. It becomes possible to set the type of X1 as an aspect that does not follow the regularity of the previous modifications.

  In addition, the number of types of ending base image X1 may be more than twice as large as "the number of types of setting values (specifically," 6 ")-1". By applying the configuration to the second alternative embodiment, the type of ending base image X1 when the setting value is changed to a large value, and the ending base image X1 when the setting value is changed to a small value It becomes possible to make sure that the type is different.

  (6) In the configuration of the second alternative embodiment, the configuration is different in the reflection mode of the difference of the setting value to the ending base image X1 when the setting value is changed to a large value and when the setting value is changed to a small value. It is also good. For example, the type of the ending base image X1 is changed in a predetermined changing order and the setting to the large value side is performed in any of the case where the setting value is changed to a large value and the setting value is changed to a small value. The type shift amount may be different between the case where the difference in value is “1” and the case where the difference in setting value to the smaller value side is “1”. In this case, it is possible to make the player predict the change degree of the setting value based on the deviation amount of the type of the ending base image X1 in accordance with the predetermined change order.

  (7) In the second embodiment, the directionality for changing the type of the ending base image X1 is opposite between the case where the setting value is changed to a large value and the case where the setting value is changed to a small value. The configuration is not limited, and the configuration may be changed in the same direction. Even in this case, it is possible to make the player predict how much the setting value has deviated.

  (8) The backup power may be supplied to the effect RAM 84, and the end screen counter 113 may be set in the effect RAM 84. In this case, when the set value is changed from the previous business day, the main side MPU 72 transmits to the effect side MPU 82 a command in which information such as the change in the set value or the change degree of the set value is set When the side MPU 82 receives the command, the side MPU 82 may be configured to correct the value of the end screen counter 113 as in the above embodiments. As a result, while reducing the processing load of the main MPU 72, it is possible to make the player predict whether the setting value has been changed or the setting value has been changed using the type of the ending base image X1.

  (9) The effect used to indicate the presence or absence of the change in the set value or the change degree of the set value is not limited to the display effect of the ending image, and the display effect of the opening image in the BB state, ART state Either the display effect of the opening image or the display effect of the ending image of the ART state may be used. Further, in a configuration in which the type of background image displayed on image display device 63 is switched to loop in accordance with a certain change order in the normal gaming state which is neither BB state nor ART state, the type of the background image is changed The above suggestion may be made using the regularity in the case of Further, the above suggestion may be made using the regularity in the case where the type of display effect is changed in each of a plurality of display effects. In this case, since there are a plurality of types of targets for which the setting value is suggested, targets to be focused on in order to predict the setting value are diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (10) In the first alternative embodiment, the second alternative embodiment, and the third alternative embodiment, when the type of the ending base image X1 is changed with the change of the setting value, the display target of the next BB state is In the configuration, the type is changed based on the type of ending base image X1 that is set as the type, but instead, the type is changed based on the type of ending base image X1 that is to be displayed in the previous BB state May be changed.

  (11) When the setting value is changed, a predetermined type of ending base image X1 may not be selected as a display target in the BB state first executed thereafter. The predetermined type may be a part of all types of the ending base image X1, and one or two out of five types may be set as the predetermined type. For example, when the image C is set as the predetermined type, the image B is originally displayed if the display target of the ending base image X1 in the last BB state executed before the setting value change is performed. If there is, the display target of the ending base image X1 in the BB state to be executed first after that is the image C, but since the image C is set to the predetermined type, it is set as the next order The image D is to be displayed. In this case, it is confirmed that the type of ending base image X1 in the BB state last executed in a predetermined business day is the image B, and the ending base image in the BB state first executed in the next business day By confirming that the type of X1 is the image D, it becomes possible to grasp that the setting value has been changed.

  Further, in the configuration, when the clear process of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the type of the ending base image X1 to be displayed may be initialized or may not be initialized. In the configuration in which the type of ending base image X1 is initialized when the clear process of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the type of ending base image X1 to be displayed becomes a fixed type such as image A in the initialization. You may In this case, it is possible to grasp whether the initialization of the main RAM 74 has been executed or the setting value has been changed by confirming the type of the ending base image X1.

<About distinction between specific control and non-specific control>
Next, the difference between the specific control executed by the main MPU 72 and the non-specific control will be described. In the slot machine 10, among the various controls executed by the main side MPU 72, the control regarding a part of the fraud monitoring is non-specific control, and the game progresses based on the other control regarding the fraud monitoring and the game operation by the player Control other than non-specific control, including control for causing them to be controlled, is specified as specific control. More specifically, the control by the main process (FIG. 8) executed when the supply of the operation power to the main MPU 72 is started, and the control by the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) executed periodically. Is included in the specific control. In addition, the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process executed in the start waiting process (FIG. 11) and the third non-specific control process executed in the reel control process (FIG. 24) are generally excluded. Control by processing (FIG. 10), for example, lottery processing of a combination executed based on the operation of the start lever 41, drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and award of benefits when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate Control is included in specific control.

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram for describing a setting mode of programs and data in the main ROM 73. As shown in FIG. The control executed by main MPU 72 is differentiated between the specific control and the non-specific control, and as shown in FIG. 59, the main ROM 73 also uses a program for specific control and a specific control. The address of the area where the data and the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are stored is clearly distinguished. Specifically, programs for specific control are collectively stored in the area of each successive address within the range of the addresses X (1) to X (k + 2). In addition, addresses X (k + 3) to X (k + 5) following addresses X (1) to X (k + 2) are addresses of unused areas in which data are not stored, and address X Data for specific control is collected and stored in the area of each successive address in the range of k + 6) to X (m + 2). Also, addresses X (m + 3) to X (m + 5) following addresses X (k + 6) to X (m + 2) are addresses of unused areas in which data are not stored, and address X (m Programs for non-specific control are stored collectively in the area of each successive address in the range of m + 6) to X (n + 2). In addition, addresses X (n + 3) to X (n + 5) following addresses X (m + 6) to X (n + 2) are addresses of unused areas in which data are not stored. Data for non-specific control are stored collectively in the area of each successive address in the range of n + 6) to X (p + 2). The relationship between the program and data as described above and the address is set in both the physical address in the main ROM 73 and the logical address on the memory map recognized in the main MPU 72.

  As described above, the program for specific control and the data for specific control, and the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are independent of the execution order of the process for executing the corresponding control, For example, when only a program for specific control and data for specific control are checked by storing in an area of an address of a different range, an address where the program for specific control and the data for specific control are stored Only the area of the range needs to be checked. For example, when only the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are checked, an address at which the program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control are stored You only need to check the area of the range. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently carry out an operation in the case where programs and data are checked separately for specific control and non-specific control. Moreover, it becomes possible to perform efficiently the task in the case of distinguishing and modifying a program and data by specific control and non-specific control in connection with it.

  Any data is stored between the address range of the area where the program for specific control and data for specific control is stored, and the address range of the area where the program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control are stored By setting the address range of the unused area which is not used, it becomes easy to grasp the boundary between the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control at the time of check work.

  In each of the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control, the program and data are stored in the area of the address of different range regardless of the execution order of the process for executing the corresponding control. By doing this, it is possible to efficiently carry out the work in the case of separately checking the program and the data. In addition, the address range of the unused area in which no data is stored is set between the address range of the area in which the program is stored and the address range of the area in which the data is stored. The boundary between the address range and the data address range can be easily grasped in the checking operation.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for describing a setting mode of each area in the main RAM 74. In FIG. As shown in FIG. 60, the control executed by the main side MPU 72 is distinguished between the specific control and the non-specific control, and as shown in FIG. The address range of the stack area 74b for the first embodiment is clearly distinguished from the address range of the work area 74c for the nonspecific control and the stack area 74d for the nonspecific control. Specifically, the area of each successive address within the range of the addresses Y (1) to Y (r + 2) is set as a work area 74a for specific control. Also, the addresses Y (r + 3) to Y (r + 5) following the addresses Y (1) to Y (r + 2) are addresses of unused areas, and the addresses Y (r + 6) to Y (s + 2) are subsequently followed. The area of each successive address within the range of) is set as a stack area 74b for specific control. In addition, addresses Y (s + 3) to Y (s + 5) following addresses Y (r + 6) to Y (s + 2) are addresses of unused areas, and addresses Y (s + 6) to Y (t + 2) are subsequently followed. The area of each successive address within the range of) is set as a non-specific control work area 74c. Also, addresses Y (t + 3) to Y (t + 5) following addresses Y (s + 6) to Y (t + 2) are addresses of unused areas, and addresses Y (t + 6) to Y (u + 2) are subsequently followed. The area of each successive address within the range of) is set as a stack area 74d for nonspecific control. The relationship between each area and the address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main RAM 74 and the logical address on the memory map recognized in the main MPU 72.

  As described above, when the work area 74 a for specific control and the work area 74 c for non-specific control are separately set, the main MPU 72 executes the specific control and the non-specific control. , And different areas of the main RAM 74 are used. This makes it possible to make it difficult to generate an event that data in the main RAM 74 required in the other case is erased when one of the specific control and the non-specific control is executed.

  The stack area 74b for specific control and the stack area 74d for non-specific control are separately set, so that the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is saved when the specific control is executed. Different areas are used for saving data stored in the registers of the main MPU 72 when non-specific control is performed. Thereby, when the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is saved in the situation where one of the specific control and the non-specific control is executed, the data of the register of the main MPU 72 saved in the other is erased It becomes possible to make it hard to generate events such as being done.

  Next, the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process executed by the main MPU 72 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data will be described. First, the first non-specific control process will be described.

  The first non-specific control process is executed at step S412 in the start waiting process (FIG. 11) as described above. In detail, the first non-specific control process is started when the program for specific control and the data for specific control are used to execute the start waiting process (FIG. 11). Since the call of the first non-specific control process is designated in the first non-specific control process, the first non-specific control process to be executed is started by using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data. That is, the process for calling the first non-specific control process is set in the program for specific control, and the first non-specific control process is set in the program for non-specific control. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the first non-identifying control process.

  In the first non-specific control process, first, execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is inhibited (step S3001). The timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is included in the process executed in the specific control as described above. By prohibiting the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) when the first non-specific control process is started, the process corresponding to the specific control can be performed while the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. There is no need to do it.

  Thereafter, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3002). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before the first non-specific control processing is executed is stored separately as it is. As described later, when the first non-specific control process ends and returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, the data saved in the specific control stack area 74 b is returned to the register of the main MPU 72. Thus, when the first non-specific control process ends and returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, the data state of the register of the main MPU 72 is restored to the state before the first non-specific control process is started. It is possible to

  After that, the value of the stack pointer for specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the stack area 74b for specific control is stored in the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 ( Step S3003). When the first non-specific control processing is completed, the value of this stack pointer is read from the non-specific control work area 74c, whereby the data to be restored to the register of the main MPU 72 in the specific control stack area 74b is It is possible to specify the range of the stored area.

  Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for nonspecific control is read out from the work area 74c for nonspecific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3004). Then, from the value of the read non-specific control stack pointer, the range of the area where the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 74 d in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified, and the range of the specified area The data stored in is restored to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3005). As a result, the state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the state where the non-specific control was previously performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a is ON (step S3006), and if ON (step S3006: YES), the first insertion detection set in the register of the main MPU 72 The flag is set to "1" (step S3007). The state in which the first insertion detection flag is set to “1” is cleared to “0” when the second insertion medal detection sensor 45 b does not detect medals from the state of detection. . If a negative determination is made in step S3006, or if the process of step S3007 is performed, it is determined whether the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b is ON (step S3008). If the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b is ON (step S3008: YES), it is determined whether "1" is set in the first input detection flag (step S3009).

  If “1” is not set in the first insertion detection flag (step S3009: NO), the second insertion medal is detected after the medal is detected by the first insertion medal detection sensor 45a if the regular medal is inserted. That the medals should be detected by the sensor 45b, but the medals are detected by the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b under the condition that the medals are not detected by the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a It becomes. In this case, there is a possibility that an act of causing the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b to erroneously detect passage of medals has been performed using a fraudulent jig. Therefore, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the effect MPU 82 (step S3010). Note that the longest execution cycle of the first non-specific control process in the situation where the start waiting process (FIG. 11) is being executed is the shortest period during which the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a detects medals, the first insertion The shortest period from when the detection of medals is started by the medal detection sensor 45a to when the detection of medals is started by the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b, and the medals are detected by the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b. Is set shorter than any of the shortest periods.

  By receiving the abnormality notification command, the effect-side MPU 82 causes the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute an abnormality notification corresponding to the fraudulent act being performed on the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b. In this abnormality notification state, the unlocking operation to the key cylinder 14 is performed in the abnormality release determination process (step S208) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) executed after the end of the first non-specific control process. When it is specified that the reset button 56 has been operated in a situation in which the is identified, the effect releasing command is released by transmitting to the effect side MPU 82. That is, the monitoring process as to whether or not to release the abnormal notification started in the non-specific control state and the release process for releasing the abnormal notification are executed as the specific control. Since the main MPU 72 is set such that the period in which the specific control is being performed is longer than the period in which the non-specific control is being performed, the abnormality is caused by executing the monitoring process and the release process as the specific control. When the release operation of the notification is performed, the abnormal notification can be immediately released. The key cylinder 14 is provided with a sensor for specifying that the release operation has been performed, and a detection signal of this sensor is input to the main MPU 72.

  After transmitting the abnormality notification command, the value of the insertion abnormality counter provided in the work area 74c for nonspecific control in the main RAM 74 is incremented by one (step S3011). Then, when the value of the insertion abnormality counter is "3" or more (step S3012: YES), the progress of the game is stopped by becoming an infinite loop. The operation inhibited state is canceled by executing the clear process (step S104).

  Incidentally, the entry abnormality counter is cleared to “0” when the first non-specific control process is performed 40,000 times or when the main RAM 74 is initialized. When the start waiting process (FIG. 11) is repeatedly executed without the game being started, it takes about 40 seconds before the first non-specific control process is executed 40,000 times. Thus, in the configuration in which the progress of the game is stopped when an abnormal action on the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b occurs a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period, "0" clear of the insertion abnormality counter is executed as processing by nonspecific control. It becomes possible.

  If the negative determination is made in step S3008, the positive determination is made in step S3009, or the negative determination is made in step S3012, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is stored in the main RAM 74 as a stack for nonspecific control. It is evacuated to the area 74d (step S3013). As a result, immediately before returning from the first non-specific control process to the process corresponding to the specific control, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is separately stored as it is. As described above, when the first non-specific control process is started, the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 74 d is restored to the register of the main MPU 72. Thus, when the first non-specific control process is started, the data state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the non-specific control data state.

  Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in stack area 74 d for non-specific control is stored in work area 74 c for non-specific control in main side RAM 74 (Step S3014). When the processing corresponding to nonspecific control is to be executed next time, the value of this stack pointer is read from the nonspecific control work area 74c, and the main MPU 72 registers in the nonspecific control stack area 74d. It becomes possible to specify the range of the area in which the data to be stored is stored.

  Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for specific control is read out from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3015). Then, the range of the area where the data saved in the specific control stack area 74b in the main side RAM 74 is stored is specified from the value of the read specific control stack pointer, and stored in the specified area range. The stored data is restored to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3016). As a result, the state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the state for specific control immediately before the first non-specific control process of this time is started.

  Thereafter, execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is permitted (step S3017). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is periodically activated. Then, the first non-specific control process is ended. When the first non-specific control process ends, step S413 in the start waiting process (FIG. 11) is executed using the program for specific control. The data indicating that the process to be restored in the start waiting process (FIG. 11) is step S413 when the first non-specific control process ends is specified control before the first non-specific control process is started. Are stored in the work area 74a. However, the data may be stored in the non-specific control work area 74c.

  Next, the second non-specific control process will be described.

  The second non-specific control process is executed at step S416 in the start waiting process (FIG. 11) as described above. In detail, the program for specific control is executed while the start waiting process (FIG. 11) is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control when the second non-specific control process is started. Since the call of the second non-specific control process is designated in the second non-specific control process, the second non-specific control process to be executed is started by using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data. That is, the process for calling the second non-specific control process is set in the program for specific control, and the second non-specific control process is set in the program for non-specific control. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the second non-identifying control process.

  In the second non-specific control process, first, the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is inhibited (step S3101). The timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is included in the process executed in the specific control as described above. By prohibiting the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) when the second non-specific control process is started, the process corresponding to the specific control is performed while the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. There is no need to do it.

  Thereafter, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3102). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before the second non-specific control processing is executed is stored separately as it is. As described later, when the second non-specific control process ends and returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, the data saved in the specific control stack area 74 b is returned to the register of the main MPU 72. Thus, when the second non-specific control process ends and returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, the data state of the register of the main MPU 72 is restored to the state before the second non-specific control process is started. It is possible to

  After that, the value of the stack pointer for specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the stack area 74b for specific control is stored in the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 ( Step S3103). When the second non-specific control processing is completed, the value of this stack pointer is read from the non-specific control work area 74c, whereby the data to be restored to the register of the main MPU 72 in the specific control stack area 74b is It is possible to specify the range of the stored area.

  Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for nonspecific control is read out from the work area 74c for nonspecific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3104). Then, from the value of the read non-specific control stack pointer, the range of the area where the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 74 d in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified, and the range of the specified area The data stored in is restored to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3105). As a result, the state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the state where the non-specific control was previously performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the reset button 56 has been operated in a situation where the unlocking operation to the key cylinder 14 has not been performed (step S3106). The state in which the abnormality notification is being performed by the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 as described above can be released by performing the unlocking operation on the key cylinder 14 and operating the reset button 56. In this case, even if the key cylinder 14 is not unlocked, if the reset button 56 is operated, a fraudster who thinks that the state in which the abnormality notification is being executed can be cancelled, is assumed. For example, in order to release the execution state of the abnormality notification that has been started by cheating the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b, the case for the cheating jig without performing the unlocking operation on the key cylinder It is possible to insert in 11 and to operate the reset button 56 illegally. When such an action is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S3106, and an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 82 (step S3107).

  By receiving the abnormality notification command, the effect-side MPU 82 causes the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute an abnormality notification corresponding to the unauthorized operation of the reset button 56. After that, the progress of the game is stopped by becoming an infinite loop. The operation inhibited state is canceled by executing the clear process (step S104).

  If a negative determination is made in step S3106, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is saved in the stack area 74d for nonspecific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3108). As a result, immediately before returning from the second non-specific control process to the process corresponding to the specific control, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is separately stored as it is. As described above, when the second non-specific control process is started, the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 74 d is returned to the register of the main MPU 72. As a result, when the second non-specific control process is started, it is possible to restore the data state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the data state for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in stack area 74 d for non-specific control is stored in work area 74 c for non-specific control in main side RAM 74 (Step S3109). When the processing corresponding to nonspecific control is to be executed next time, the value of this stack pointer is read from the nonspecific control work area 74c, and the main MPU 72 registers in the nonspecific control stack area 74d. It becomes possible to specify the range of the area in which the data to be stored is stored.

  Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for specific control is read out from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3110). Then, the range of the area where the data saved in the specific control stack area 74b in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified from the value of the read specific control stack pointer, and stored in the specified area range. The stored data is restored to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3111). As a result, the state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the state for specific control immediately before the current second non-specific control process is started.

  Thereafter, execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is permitted (step S3112). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is periodically activated. Then, the second non-specific control process is ended. When the second non-specific control process ends, step S304 in the normal process (FIG. 10) is executed using the program for specific control. The data indicating that the process to be returned when the second non-specific control process ends is step S304 of the normal process (FIG. 10) is for specific control before the second non-specific control process is started. Are stored in the work area 74a. However, the data may be stored in the non-specific control work area 74c.

  Next, the third non-specific control process will be described.

  The third non-specific control process is executed at step S603 in the reel control process (FIG. 24) as described above. In detail, in the case where the third control process (FIG. 24) is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control when the third non-specific control process is started, the program for specific control Since the call of the third non-specific control process is designated in the third non-specific control process, the third non-specific control process to be executed is started by using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data. That is, the process for calling the third non-specific control process is set in the program for specific control, and the third non-specific control process is set in the program for non-specific control. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the second non-identifying control process.

  In the third non-specific control process, first, the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is inhibited (step S3201). The timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is included in the process executed in the specific control as described above. By prohibiting the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) when the third non-specific control process is started, the process corresponding to the specific control can be performed while the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. There is no need to do it.

  Thereafter, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3202). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before the third non-specific control process is executed is stored separately as it is. As described later, when the third non-specific control process ends and returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, the data saved in the specific control stack area 74 b is returned to the register of the main MPU 72. Thus, when the third non-specific control process ends and returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, the data state of the register of the main MPU 72 is restored to the state before the third non-specific control process is started. It is possible to

  After that, the value of the stack pointer for specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the stack area 74b for specific control is stored in the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 ( Step S3203). When the third non-specific control process is completed, the value of this stack pointer is read from the non-specific control work area 74c, whereby the data to be restored to the register of the main MPU 72 in the specific control stack area 74b is It is possible to specify the range of the stored area.

  Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for nonspecific control is read out from the work area 74c for nonspecific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3204). Then, the range of the area where the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 74 d in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified from the value of the read non-specific control stack pointer, and the range of the specified area The data stored in is restored to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3205). As a result, the state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the state where the non-specific control was previously performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not one of the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b is ON (step S3206). As already described, in the normal process (FIG. 10), the rotation start process (step S601) is executed in the reel control process (FIG. 24) to execute the reception prohibition process (step S306) before starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Basically, the medals are not detected by the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b after the execution of. The situation where one of the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b is turned on in this situation is highly likely that the fraudulent jig is inserted from the medal insertion slot 45. Therefore, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3206, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the effect MPU 82 (step S3207).

  By receiving the abnormality notification command, the effect-side MPU 82 causes the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute an abnormality notification corresponding to the fraudulent act being performed on the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b. After that, the progress of the game is stopped by becoming an infinite loop. The operation inhibited state is canceled by executing the clear process (step S104).

  If a negative determination is made in step S3206, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is saved in the stack area 74d for nonspecific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3208). As a result, immediately before returning from the third non-specific control process to the process corresponding to the specific control, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is separately stored as it is. As described above, when the third non-specific control process is started, the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 74 d is returned to the register of the main MPU 72. Thereby, when the third non-specific control process is started, it is possible to restore the data state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the non-specific control data state.

  Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in stack area 74 d for non-specific control is stored in work area 74 c for non-specific control in main side RAM 74 (Step S3209). When the processing corresponding to nonspecific control is to be executed next time, the value of this stack pointer is read from the nonspecific control work area 74c, and the main MPU 72 registers in the nonspecific control stack area 74d. It becomes possible to specify the range of the area in which the data to be stored is stored.

  Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for specific control is read out from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3210). Then, the range of the area where the data saved in the specific control stack area 74b in the main side RAM 74 is stored is specified from the value of the read specific control stack pointer, and stored in the specified area range. The stored data is restored to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3211). This makes it possible to restore the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the state for specific control immediately before the current third non-specific control process is started.

  Thereafter, execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is permitted (step S3212). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is periodically activated. Then, the third non-identifying control process is ended. When the third non-specific control process ends, the process of step S604 in the reel control process (FIG. 24) is executed using the program for specific control. The data indicating that the processing to be returned in the reel control processing (FIG. 24) is step S604 when the third non-specific control processing is completed is specified control before the third non-specific control processing is started. Are stored in the work area 74a. However, the data may be stored in the non-specific control work area 74c.

<Effect of configuration in which specific control and non-specific control are distinguished>
When the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process are executed in the start waiting process (FIG. 11), the data stored at that time in the register of the main MPU 72 is for specific control in the main RAM 74 Is evacuated to the stack area 74b of Similarly, when the third non-specific control process is executed in the reel control process (FIG. 24), the data stored at that time in the register of the main MPU 72 is the stack area 74b for the specific control in the main RAM 74. Be evacuated to Thereby, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed, it becomes possible to prevent data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 from being rewritten when executing processing corresponding to specific control. . Further, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends, the data saved in the specific control stack area 74 b is restored to the register of the main MPU 72. Thereby, when the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed, it becomes possible to execute the process corresponding to specific control from the state of the register of main side MPU 72 before execution of the process corresponding to the non-specific control. .

  When the process corresponding to non-specific control is executed, the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent further occurrence of processing interruption in a situation where processing corresponding to non-specific control is being performed in a state where data is saved in stack area 74b for specific control. . Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent the processing configuration for saving data from becoming complicated.

  In the start waiting process (FIG. 11), the first non-specific control process (step S412) is executed as the process corresponding to non-specific control, and the second non-specific control process (step S416) is performed. (1) Execution of the timer interrupt process is temporarily permitted while the first non-specific control process is not integrated as a series of processes and the first non-specific control process is completed. 2) When the non-specific control process is started, the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted again. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period during which the execution of the timer interrupt process is continuously prohibited to execute the process corresponding to the non-specific control, and the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process It is possible to secure an opportunity for timer interrupt processing to be executed between the two.

  Saving and restoring the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 to the stack area 74b for specific control when executing processing corresponding to specific control corresponds to each of the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process Let it be done individually. Thus, the data is saved in each of the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process, and a timer interrupt is generated between the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process. In the configuration in which the opportunity to execute the process is secured, the timer interrupt process is executed under the condition that the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is saved in the stack area 74b for specific control when executing the process corresponding to the specific control. It is possible to prevent execution.

  When the process corresponding to non-specific control is executed, not only the data of the register of main MPU 72 at that time is saved in stack area 74b for specific control, but the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. In this case, the data of the register of the main MPU 72 at that time is saved in the stack area 74d for nonspecific control. As a result, the data state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be switched accordingly according to whether the process corresponding to the specific control is executed or the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, It is possible to appropriately perform each of processing corresponding to control and processing corresponding to non-specific control.

  In the main ROM 73, an address group of a program for specific control for executing processing corresponding to specific control and an address group of a program for non-specific control for executing processing corresponding to non-specific control are clear. Are distinguished. As a result, it is possible to improve the workability in the case where only one program of the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control is checked or corrected.

  Also in the main side RAM 74, the address group of the use area when executing the process corresponding to the specific control and the address group of the use area when performing the process corresponding to the non-specific control are the work area 74a for specific control and It is clearly distinguished as a work area 74c for nonspecific control. Thereby, when one of the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is performed, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other processing from being rewritten. .

<Another form of configuration in which specific control and non-specific control are distinguished>
<First alternative form of configuration in which specific control and non-specific control are distinguished>
In the first alternative embodiment, the processing configuration in the case where nonspecific control is executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the above embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. In addition, the description is fundamentally abbreviate | omitted about the structure same as the said embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing start waiting processing in the first alternative embodiment.

  In the start waiting process, as the other processes of step S3301, the same processes as steps S401 to S411 of the start waiting process (FIG. 11) in the above embodiment are executed. Thereafter, execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is inhibited (step S3302), and data of all registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3303). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before the first non-specific control processing is executed is stored separately as it is. Incidentally, the processes of steps S3301 to S3303 are executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  Thereafter, the first non-specific control process is executed using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data (step S3304). FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a first non-identifying control process in the first alternative embodiment.

  In the first non-specific control process, first, the value of the stack pointer for specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the stack area 74 b for specific control is calculated by using the main RAM 74 for non-specific control. It is stored in the work area 74c (step S3401). When the first non-specific control process ends and the process returns to the start waiting process, the value of this stack pointer is read from the non-specific control work area 74c, so that the main MPU 72's in the specific control stack area 74b. It is possible to specify the range of the area in which the data to be restored to the register is stored.

  Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for nonspecific control is read out from the work area 74c for nonspecific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3402). Then, from the value of the read non-specific control stack pointer, the range of the area where the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 74 d in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified, and the range of the specified area The data stored in is restored to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3403). As a result, the state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the state where the non-specific control was previously performed.

  Thereafter, as the other processing of step S3404, the same processing as step S3006 to step S3012 of the first non-identifying control processing (FIG. 61) in the above embodiment is executed. As a result, monitoring processing is performed as to whether or not the fraudulent activity has been performed on the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b, and processing to cope with the fraudulent activity has been performed. Be done.

  Thereafter, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is saved in the stack area 74d for nonspecific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3405). As a result, immediately before returning from the first non-specific control process to the process corresponding to the specific control, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is separately stored as it is. As described above, when the first non-specific control process is started, the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 74 d is restored to the register of the main MPU 72. Thus, when the first non-specific control process is started, the data state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the non-specific control data state.

  Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in stack area 74 d for non-specific control is stored in work area 74 c for non-specific control in main side RAM 74 (Step S3406). When the processing corresponding to nonspecific control is to be executed next time, the value of this stack pointer is read from the nonspecific control work area 74c, and the main MPU 72 registers in the nonspecific control stack area 74d. It becomes possible to specify the range of the area in which the data to be stored is stored. Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for specific control is read out from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3407).

  When the first non-specific control process ends, the processes of steps S3305 to S3309 are executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control. Specifically, based on the value of the stack pointer read in step S3407 of the first non-specific control process, the range of the area where the data saved in the specific control stack area 74b in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified. The data stored in the range of the specified area is restored to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3305). As a result, the state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the state for specific control immediately before the first non-specific control process of this time is started. Thereafter, execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is permitted (step S3306). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is periodically activated.

  Thereafter, as the other processing of step S3307, the same processing as step S413 to step S415 of the start waiting processing (FIG. 11) in the above embodiment is executed. Thereafter, the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is inhibited (step S3308), and the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3309). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before the second non-specific control processing is executed is stored separately as it is.

  Thereafter, the second non-specific control process is executed using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data (step S3310). In the second non-specific control process, similarly to the first non-specific control process, first, the value of the specific control stack pointer for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the specific control stack area 74b , And stored in the work area 74c for nonspecific control in the main RAM 74. Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for nonspecific control is read out from the work area 74c for nonspecific control in the main RAM 74. Then, from the value of the read non-specific control stack pointer, the range of the area where the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 74 d in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified, and the range of the specified area The data stored in the main MPU 72 is restored to the register of the main MPU 72. Thereafter, the same process as step S3106 to step S3107 of the second non-identifying control process (FIG. 62) in the above embodiment is executed. As a result, monitoring processing is performed as to whether or not the unauthorized operation of the reset button 56 has been performed, and processing for coping with the case where such an illegal operation has been performed is executed. Thereafter, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is saved in the stack area 74 d for nonspecific control in the main RAM 74. Also, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in stack area 74 d for non-specific control is stored in work area 74 c for non-specific control in main side RAM 74 Let Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for specific control is read out from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74.

  When the second non-specific control process ends, the processes of steps S3311 to S3312 are executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control. Specifically, from the value of the stack pointer read at the end of the second non-specific control process, the range of the area where the data saved in the specific control stack area 74 b in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified. The data stored in the range of the identified area is restored to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3311). As a result, the state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the state for specific control immediately before the current second non-specific control process is started. Thereafter, execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is permitted (step S3312). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is periodically activated.

  In the third non-specific control process, the same process as step S3302 to step S3303 is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control before starting the third non-specific control process. Do. When the third non-specific control process is started, the same process as steps S3401 to S3403 is executed using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data. In addition, when the third specific control process ends, the same process as step S3405 to step S3407 is executed using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data. Also, when the third non-specific control process ends and returns to the reel control process, the same process as step S3305 to step S3306 is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  According to the above configuration, when the process corresponding to non-specific control is started, the data stored in the register of main MPU 72 at that time is saved in stack area 74 b for specific control in main RAM 74, and When the processing corresponding to non-specific control is ended, the processing for restoring the data saved in the specific control stack area 74b to the registers of the main MPU 72 uses the specific control program and the specific control data. To be executed. Further, processing for inhibiting execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9), which is processing corresponding to specific control, and processing for permitting execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) are also for the program for specific control and for specific control. It is executed using data. Thereby, the program and data for executing the process for handling the data used when executing the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the specific control are aggregated into the program for specific control and the data for specific control It becomes possible.

<Second another embodiment of configuration in which specific control and non-specific control are distinguished>
In the second alternative embodiment, the processing configuration in the case where nonspecific control is executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the above embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. In addition, the description is fundamentally abbreviate | omitted about the structure same as the said embodiment.

  FIG. 66 (a) is a flow chart showing the start waiting process in this embodiment, and FIG. 66 (b) is a flow chart showing the reel control process in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the start waiting process, as the other processes of step S3501, the same processes as steps S401 to S411 of the start waiting process (FIG. 11) in the above embodiment are executed, and the process proceeds to step S3502. Call processing of non-specific control in place of the first non-specific control processing, and as the other processing of step S3503, the same processing as step S413 to step S415 of the start waiting processing (FIG. 11) in the above embodiment In step S3504, a calling process of non-specific control is executed instead of the second non-specific control process. Further, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the reel control process, the rotation start process is executed in step S3601 similarly to step S601 of the reel control process (FIG. 24) in the above embodiment, and in step S3602 all reels 32L, It is determined whether 32M or 32R has stopped. When all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped (step S3602: NO), a calling process of nonspecific control is executed instead of the third nonspecific control process at step S3603, and the above implementation is performed in step S3604. The same processing as steps S604 to S615 of the reel control processing (FIG. 24) in the embodiment is executed. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S3602: YES), the same processing as steps S616 to S617 in the reel control processing (FIG. 24) in the above embodiment is executed in step S3605. .

  FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing a calling process of non-specific control executed in step S3502 and step S3504 of start waiting process (FIG. 66 (a)) and step S3603 of reel control process (FIG. 66 (b)). . The call process of the non-specific control is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control except for the non-specific control process activated in step S3704 described later.

  In the non-specific control calling process, first, the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is inhibited (step S3701), and the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 Step S3702). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before the nonspecific control processing is executed is stored separately as it is.

  Thereafter, the module address table stored in the main ROM 73 as data for specific control is read out to the work area 74a for specific control in the main RAM 74, and nonspecific control processing corresponding to the current call target is executed. The address of the area of the main ROM 73 in which the nonspecific control program is stored is acquired from the module address table (step S3703). In the module address table, the correspondence between the type of processing that triggers execution processing of non-specific control and the start address of the non-specific control program for executing non-specific control processing to be executed is set. ing. Specifically, the non-specific control program for executing the first non-specific control process is the calling process of the non-specific control executed in step S3502 of the start waiting process (FIG. 66 (a)). A program for nonspecific control for executing the second nonspecific control process if the start address is acquired and the call process of the nonspecific control is executed in step S3504 of the start waiting process (FIG. 66 (a)) The start address of is acquired, and if it is a calling process of non-specific control executed in step S3603 of the reel control process (FIG. 66 (b)), the non-specific control process for non-specific control is executed. The start address of the program is obtained.

  Thereafter, nonspecific control processing of the type corresponding to the address acquired in step S3703 is executed (step S3704). In this case, the non-specific control process is executed using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data. Although the first non-specific control process, the second non-specific control process, and the third non-specific control process exist as the non-specific control process, the processing contents of the first to third non-specific control processes Is the same as the processing content of the first to third non-specific control processing in the first alternative embodiment. In this case, as the first process in each non-specific control process, the value of the specific control stack pointer for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the specific control stack area 74b is It is stored in the work area 74c for non-specific control in the RAM 74. Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for nonspecific control is read out from the work area 74c for nonspecific control in the main RAM 74. Then, from the value of the read non-specific control stack pointer, the range of the area where the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 74 d in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified, and the range of the specified area The data stored in the main MPU 72 is restored to the register of the main MPU 72. Thereafter, the fraud monitoring process corresponding to the current non-specific control process is executed. Thereafter, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is saved in the stack area 74 d for nonspecific control in the main RAM 74. Also, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in stack area 74 d for non-specific control is stored in work area 74 c for non-specific control in main side RAM 74 Let Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for specific control is read out from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74.

  When the execution of the non-specific control process that has become the current execution target ends, the processes of steps S3705 and S3706 are executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control. Specifically, from the value of the stack pointer read in the last process of the non-specific control process executed this time, the range of the area where the data saved in the specific control stack area 74 b in the main RAM 74 is stored Are identified, and the data stored in the range of the identified area is returned to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3705). As a result, the state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the state for specific control immediately before the current non-specific control process is started. Thereafter, execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is permitted (step S3706). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is periodically activated.

  According to the above configuration, when the process corresponding to non-specific control is started, the data stored in the register of main MPU 72 at that time is saved in stack area 74 b for specific control in main RAM 74, and When the processing corresponding to non-specific control is ended, the processing for restoring the data saved in the specific control stack area 74b to the registers of the main MPU 72 uses the specific control program and the specific control data. To be executed. Further, processing for inhibiting execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9), which is processing corresponding to specific control, and processing for permitting execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) are also for the program for specific control and for specific control. It is executed using data. Thereby, the program and data for executing the process for handling the data used when executing the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the specific control are aggregated into the program for specific control and the data for specific control It becomes possible.

  Also, processing for saving data in stack area 74b for specific control, processing for recovering data from stack area 74b for specific control, processing for inhibiting execution of timer interrupt processing, and execution of timer interrupt processing The process of permitting the first non-specific control process is not set for each of the first non-specific control process, the second non-specific control process, and the third non-specific control process, but the first non-specific control process Among the control process and the third non-specific control process, a process for calling a process to be executed is set. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the specific control program by that amount.

<Third alternative embodiment of configuration in which specific control and non-specific control are distinguished>
In the third alternative embodiment, the contents of the non-specific control calling process are different from those in the second alternative embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the second alternative embodiment is basically omitted.

  The call process for non-specific control in the second alternative embodiment (FIG. 67) is configured to be executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control except for the non-specific control process of step S3704. However, the calling process of non-specific control in this embodiment is all executed using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data. That is, in step S3502 and step S3504 in the start waiting process (FIG. 66 (a)) and step S3603 in the reel control process (FIG. 66 (b)), the program for specific control and the data for specific control are used. , The setting process for making the non-specific control call process started is performed, and the non-specific control call process itself is executed using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data Be done.

  FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing a calling process of non-specific control in this embodiment.

  First, execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is inhibited (step S3801), and data of all registers of the main MPU 72 are saved in the stack area 74b for specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3802). As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 immediately before the calling process of the non-specific control is executed is stored separately as it is.

  After that, the value of the stack pointer for specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in the stack area 74b for specific control is stored in the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 ( Step S3803). When the process for calling non-specific control is completed and the process returns to start waiting processing or reel control processing, the value of this stack pointer is read from work area 74 c for non-specific control, in specific stack area 74 b for specific control. It is possible to specify the range of the area in which the data to be restored is stored in the register of the main MPU 72.

  Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for nonspecific control is read out from the work area 74c for nonspecific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3804). Then, from the value of the read non-specific control stack pointer, the range of the area where the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 74 d in the main RAM 74 is stored is specified, and the range of the specified area The data stored in is restored to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3805). As a result, the state of the register of the main MPU 72 can be restored to the state where the non-specific control was previously performed.

  After that, the module address table stored in the main ROM 73 as data for nonspecific control is read out to the work area 74c for nonspecific control in the main RAM 74, and nonspecific control processing corresponding to the current call target is executed. The address of the area of the main ROM 73 in which the program for nonspecific control for the purpose is stored is acquired from the module address table (step S3806). Similar to the second embodiment, the module address table is a type of process that triggers execution of the non-specific control calling process and a non-specific control program for executing the non-specific control process to be executed. The correspondence with the start address of is set. Specifically, the non-specific control program for executing the first non-specific control process is the calling process of the non-specific control executed in step S3502 of the start waiting process (FIG. 66 (a)). A program for nonspecific control for executing the second nonspecific control process if the start address is acquired and the call process of the nonspecific control is executed in step S3504 of the start waiting process (FIG. 66 (a)) The start address of is acquired, and if it is a calling process of non-specific control executed in step S3603 of the reel control process (FIG. 66 (b)), the non-specific control process for non-specific control is executed. The start address of the program is obtained.

  Incidentally, in step S3502 and step S3504 of the start waiting process (FIG. 66 (a)) and step S3602 of the reel control process (FIG. 66 (b)), a calling process of non-specific control is started. Not only the setting process is executed, but also a process for storing data indicating the type of process that triggered execution of the non-specific control calling process in the non-specific control work area 74 c in the main RAM 74 is executed. In step S3806, the data stored in the non-specific control work area 74c is used to identify the type of processing that triggered execution of the non-specific control calling process, and the corresponding non-specific control process is performed. The corresponding start address is obtained from the module address table. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and in step S3502 and step S3504 of the start waiting process (FIG. 66 (a)) and step S3602 of the reel control process (FIG. 66 (b)) Data indicating the type of processing that triggered execution of the process is stored in the work area 74a for specific control in the main RAM 74, and in step S3806 the data stored in the work area 74a for specific control is used to The type of processing that has triggered execution of the specific control calling process may be specified, and the start address corresponding to the type of non-specific control processing may be acquired from the module address table.

  Thereafter, non-specific control processing of the type corresponding to the address acquired in step S3806 is executed (step S3807). As the non-specific control process, there are a first non-specific control process, a second non-specific control process, and a third non-specific control process. In each of the non-specific control processes, a process for permitting or prohibiting the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) and a process for saving or restoring data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 are not executed. And execute processing for performing fraud monitoring corresponding to each non-specific control processing. Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69, in the first non-identifying control process, in steps S3901 to S3907, steps S3006 to S3012 of the first non-identifying control process (FIG. 61) in the above another embodiment are performed. Execute processing only. In the second non-identifying control process, only the processes of step S3106 and step S3107 of the second non-identifying control process (FIG. 62) in the above embodiment are executed. In the third non-identifying control process, only the processes of step S3206 and step S3207 of the third non-identifying control process (FIG. 63) in the above embodiment are executed.

  In the non-specific control calling process, after executing the non-specific control process in step S3807, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is saved in the non-specific control stack area 74d in the main RAM 74 (step S3808) . As a result, the data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is stored separately as it is immediately before returning from the calling process of non-specific control to the process corresponding to the specific control. As described above, when the call process of non-specific control is started, the data saved in the non-specific control stack area 74 d is returned to the register of the main MPU 72. As a result, when the calling process of non-specific control is started, it is possible to restore the data state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the data state for non-specific control.

  Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for non-specific control for specifying the range in which the save data of the register is stored in stack area 74 d for non-specific control is stored in work area 74 c for non-specific control in main side RAM 74 (Step S3809). When the call processing of non-specific control is to be executed next time, the value of this stack pointer should be read from the work area 74 c for non-specific control to restore the register of the main MPU 72 in the non-specific control stack area 74 d. It is possible to specify the range of the area in which the data is stored.

  Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer for specific control is read out from the work area 74c for non-specific control in the main RAM 74 (step S3810). Then, from the value of the read stack pointer, the range of the area where the data saved in the specific control stack area 74b in the main side RAM 74 is stored is specified, and the data stored in the range of the specified area Are restored to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3811). This makes it possible to restore the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the state for specific control immediately before the current non-specific control calling process is started. Thereafter, execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is permitted (step S3812). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is periodically activated.

  According to the above configuration, the processing for saving and restoring data when executing processing corresponding to non-specific control, and the processing for prohibiting or permitting execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) are all for non-specific control It is executed using program and data for non-specific control. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  Further, the process of saving and restoring data when executing the process corresponding to non-specific control, and the process of prohibiting or permitting the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) are the first non-specific control process, the second non-specific control process, A process to be executed among the first non-specific control process, the second non-specific control process, and the third non-specific control process instead of being set for each of the specific control process and the third non-specific control process It is set for processing to call. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the nonspecific control program and the nonspecific control data by that amount.

<Another embodiment of the configuration in which specific control and non-specific control are distinguished>
(1) In the above embodiments, only one main ROM 73 is provided, and a program for specific control, data for specific control, a program for non-specific control, and non-specific control for the one main ROM 73 are provided. Instead of this, a plurality of (for example, two) main ROMs 73 are connected to the main MPU 72 via a bus, and a part (for example, 1 Programs for specific control and data for specific control are stored in the main ROM 73) and programs for non-specific control and data for non-specific control are stored in different main ROM 73 (for example, one) It is good also as composition. In this case, when only one of the program for specific control and the data for specific control and the program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control is checked, only the corresponding main side ROM 73 is taken out. Can be checked. In addition, when only one of the program for specific control and the data for specific control and the program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control is used in common among a plurality of models, it corresponds The main ROM 73 can be used in common.

  (2) In the above embodiments, when executing processing corresponding to non-specific control, execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is prohibited, and then data in all registers of the main MPU 72 is specified in the main RAM 74. Instead of saving data in all registers of the main MPU 72 into the stack area 74b for specific control, execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is executed instead of the control stack area 74b. The configuration may be prohibited.

  (3) In the above embodiments, when the processing corresponding to non-specific control is ended, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is permitted, but instead, the data saved in the specific control stack area 74b is restored to the registers of the main MPU 72 after the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is permitted to be executed. It may be configured to

  (4) In the above embodiments, the stack area 74d for nonspecific control is provided, and when ending the processing corresponding to the nonspecific control, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is the stack for nonspecific control. Although the data saved in area 74 d and processed for non-specific control is executed, the data saved in non-specific control stack area 74 d is restored to the registers of main MPU 72, but the non-specific control is used. The data stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is saved when the process corresponding to the nonspecific control is finished when the process corresponding to the nonspecific control is executed without providing the stack area 74d of It is good also as composition which is erased without. In this case, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is ended and the process corresponding to the specific control is started, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is once erased and then saved in the stack area 74 b for specific control. The stored data may be restored to the register of the main MPU 72. This makes it possible to prevent the processing corresponding to the specific control from being resumed in a state where unnecessary data remains in the register of the main MPU 72 when the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed. It becomes.

  (5) In the start waiting process (FIG. 11), the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process may be set to have a continuous processing order. Even in this case, when the first non-specific control process ends, the data saved in the specific control stack area 74b when starting the first non-specific control process is stored in the register of the main MPU 72. At the same time, the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is permitted once while the second non-specific control process is started, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is saved in the specific control stack area 74b. At the same time, the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) may be inhibited. As a result, even if the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process are set to have a continuous processing order, the first non-specific control process and the second non-specific control process are performed. It is possible to secure an opportunity for the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) to be executed between the processes.

  (6) When executing processing corresponding to non-specific control, timer interrupt processing is performed even during execution of processing corresponding to non-specific control instead of the configuration that prohibits execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) It is good also as composition which can generate interruption of (Drawing 9). In this case, after the end of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the process corresponding to the nonspecific control being executed is resumed. Therefore, at the start of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is saved in the stack area 74d for nonspecific control, and the nonspecific control is performed when the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) ends. The data saved in the stack area 74d for use is restored to the register of the main MPU 72.

  In this configuration, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is executed by interrupting both the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Therefore, at the start of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), it is specified whether the process currently being executed is the process corresponding to the specific control or the process corresponding to the non-specific control, and the process corresponding to the specific control If there is, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is saved in the stack area 74b for specific control, and if the processing corresponds to nonspecific control, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is stored in the stack area 74d for nonspecific control Evacuate. Then, when the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is ended, it is specified which one of the stack area 74b for specific control and the stack area 74d for nonspecific control is the target for which data saving was performed at the start thereof. The data is restored from the identified stack areas 74b and 74d to the registers of the main MPU 72.

  (7) A process (corresponding to step S3001) for inhibiting the execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) when executing the process corresponding to non-specific control, the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 for specific control Processing (corresponding to step S3002) for saving the stack point value corresponding to the specific control stack area 74b in the non-specific control work area 74c (corresponding to step S3003), A process of reading out the value of the stack pointer for specific control from the non-specific control work area 74c (corresponding to step S3004), and a process of restoring data from the non-specific control stack area 74d to the register of the main MPU 72 (step S3005) Data for all registers of the main MPU 72 for non-specific control A process of saving to the stack area 74 d (corresponding to step S 3013), a process of saving the value of the stack pointer corresponding to the non-specific control stack area 74 d in the non-specific control work area 74 c (corresponding to step S 3014) Processing for reading out the value of the control stack pointer from the non-specific control work area 74c (corresponding to step S3015), processing for restoring data from the specific control stack area 74b to the registers of the main MPU 72 (corresponding to step S3016) And the process (corresponding to step S3017) for permitting execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) may be executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control.

  (8) A process corresponding to the specific control and a process corresponding to the non-specific control, instead of the configuration in which the work area 74 a for specific control and the work area 74 c for non-specific control are clearly distinguished in the main side RAM 74 The configuration may be such that the common work area of the main RAM 74 is used even if any of the above is executed. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom when using the area of the main RAM 74.

  (9) In the above embodiments, the information of the stack pointer is stored in the non-specific control work area 74 c when the data of all the registers of the main MPU 72 is saved in the specific control stack area 74 b. Instead of this, the information of the stack pointer may be stored in the specific control work area 74a.

  (10) As processing corresponding to non-specific control, occurrence of cheating activity of a type different from the cheating activity being monitored in the first non-specific control processing, the second non-specific control processing, and the third non-specific control processing It is good also as composition set up processing for monitoring. Also, as processing corresponding to non-specific control, in addition to or instead of processing for monitoring the occurrence of fraudulent acts such as first non-specific control processing, second non-specific control processing and third non-specific control processing, A process different from the process for monitoring the occurrence of fraudulent activity may be set. For example, the process for externally outputting the test information used when performing the operation test of the slot machine 10 may be set as the process corresponding to the nonspecific control.

Other Embodiments
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different embodiments may be individually applied to the configurations of the above-described embodiment, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined with each other, and the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined or applied separately or in combination with each other. Good.

  (1) When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in a stop order different from the stop order corresponding to the bell winning establishment when medals are won in any of the index values IV = 1 to 3, medals are paid out. It is good also as composition which does not occur.

  (2) The number of effective lines is not limited to one main line ML. The number of effective lines may be two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of activated lines may increase as the number of betted game media increases, and the maximum number of activated lines may be set irrespective of the number of betted game media.

  (3) The types of information transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 82 are not limited to those in the above embodiments, and for example, when a prize corresponding to the provision of a game medium is established, the prize is awarded Information on the number of game media to be played may be transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the effect MPU 82. In this case, information on the number of game media provided by winning can be notified on the image display device 63 or the like. Also, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, when the rotation of some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the corresponding information is on the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the effect MPU 82. In this case, it is possible to perform effects corresponding to the rotation conditions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63 or the like.

  (4) In the above embodiment, although the bonus for paying out the medal is awarded when the small winning combination is established, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and some bonus is given to the player. I hope there is. For example, a prize other than the medal may be paid out when the small winning combination is established. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion or medal payout functions and manages the medals owned by the player as credits, the increase of credited medals corresponds to the provision of a privilege.

  (5) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B-type slot machine, and also C-type, composite type of A-type and C-type, composite type of B-type and C-type, further, RT game, CT game or AT The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type equipped with a game.

  (6) The symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, characters, etc., and may be geometric lines, figures, etc. Further, it is also possible to configure the symbol by light, color or the like, or the symbol may be configured by a three-dimensional shape or the like, or the symbol may be configured by combining these symbols. That is, the design should just have a function as information having distinctiveness.

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, the slot machine 10 has been described as an example, but it may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game is performed using a game ball as a game medium, and the slot machine and the pachinko machine The present invention may be applied to a game machine of a type integrated with a machine.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configuration shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
Combination lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) that executes lottery processing of a combination based on an operation of the start operation unit;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop fluctuation display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
When the start operation means is operated and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the pattern is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the variable display of the pattern is stopped. Picture display control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means;
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the fluctuation display of the pattern, the corresponding execution to execute the control corresponding to the combination as the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is executed Means (a function of executing the medal payout process and the process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72);
In the gaming machine provided with
The corresponding execution means executes a predetermined corresponding execution to execute a corresponding control based on the fact that the stop operation mode of the fluctuation display of the pattern becomes a predetermined mode when the predetermined correspondence role is won in the lottery process of the role And means for executing the processing of step S1404, step S1509, step S1510, step S1612, step S1706, step S1707, step S1710 and step S1711 in the main MPU 72,
The game machine is
First control means (main side MPU 72) having the role lottery means;
First notifying means (special display unit 67) controlled by the first control means;
Second control means (effect side MPU 82) for controlling the second notification means (image display device 63) so that notification is executed based on the information transmitted by the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means corresponds to any one of the predetermined mode and the predetermined mode so as not to be in the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding role is won in the lottery process of the role. First notification control means (a function to execute the processing of step S1804, step S1808, step S1813, step S1906 and step S1912 in the main MPU 72) to control the first notification means so that
The second control means is a target to be the target of the first notification among the modes for preventing the predetermined mode and the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding role is won in the lottery process of the role. A game comprising a second notification control means (function to execute the processing of step S2002 in the effect side MPU 82) for controlling the second notification means so that the second notification corresponding to the aspect is executed. Machine.

  According to the feature A1, when the predetermined correspondence combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the notification corresponding to the predetermined manner or the notification corresponding to the manner for preventing the predetermined manner is performed, the notification The player who confirms the can make the stop operation mode a predetermined mode or not a predetermined mode, and can execute the control corresponding to the predetermined response combination or not execute the control corresponding to the predetermined response combination. It becomes. In the above configuration, the second notification is executed by the second notification unit based on the control of the second control unit when the player is elected as the predetermined response combination, whereby the player's attention to the second notification can be obtained. Even if the processing load for causing the second notification means to execute notification to increase the processing load becomes high, it is possible to prevent the influence from affecting the first control means.

  However, in the configuration in which the second notification is executed by the second notification unit based on the control of the second control unit, the communication path between the first control unit and the second control unit or the second control unit An act of trying to gain profits unfairly is assumed, while making the second informing means unfairly perform the second informing by the second informing means by giving injustice. In this case, it is assumed that it is difficult for the game hall manager to understand that the fraudulent activity is being performed because the second notification is being performed by the second notification means.

  On the other hand, not only the second notification is performed by the second notification unit controlled by the second control unit, but also the first notification is performed by the first notification unit directly controlled by the first control unit. It will be. As a result, when the second notification is executed in the second notification means, the above-mentioned cheating is performed by visually confirming whether the first notification is also executed in the first notification means. It is possible to confirm whether the

  As described above, control for executing notification of the stop mode can be suitably performed.

In the configuration of the feature A1,
"The above-mentioned pattern display means is provided with a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying a pattern,
A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the pattern display area,
The pattern display control means controls the pattern display means so that the variation display of the pattern in the pattern display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means.
The predetermined aspect and the aspect for preventing the predetermined aspect are that the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped in a predetermined correspondence order. "
The configuration may be applied.

  Feature A2. The first notification control means prevents the first notification means from executing a notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination when the predetermined correspondence combination is not won in the lottery process of the combination. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that

  According to the feature A2, when the predetermined correspondence combination is not won, the notification corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination is not executed by the first notification unit, thereby clarifying the role of the first notification unit. It is possible to

  Feature A3. The first notification control means is configured to cause the first notification to be executed by the first notification means when the second notification is executed by the second notification means. A1 or A2 The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature A3, when the second notification is executed in the second notification unit, the first notification is executed in the first notification unit. Therefore, the second notification is executed in the second notification unit. In the case where the second notification is performed, it is possible to check each time whether the notification is correct or not.

  Feature A4. The first notification control means allows the player to grasp the content of the stop operation mode in which the first notification in the first notification means is the notification target rather than the second notification in the second notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A3 characterized in that the difficulty mode is achieved.

  According to the feature A4, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second notification means in a configuration in which both the first notification means and the second notification means are provided. As a result, even if the notification mode in the first notification means is a simple mode, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein a display range of the first notification means is narrower than a display range of the second notification means.

  According to the feature A5, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second notification means in the configuration in which both the first notification means and the second notification means are provided. As a result, even if the notification mode in the first notification means is a simple mode, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature A6. The transmission means (the step S1805, the step S1809, the step S1814, the step S1907, and the step S1907 in the main MPU 72) for transmitting the predetermined information enabling the first control means to execute the second notification in the second notification means Function to execute the processing of S1913),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information does not include the result of the lottery process of the combination itself.

  According to the feature A6, even if the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is illegally accessed and the predetermined information is illegally acquired, the result of the lottery process of the winning combination will be grasped from the predetermined information It becomes possible to make it impossible. As a result, it is possible to substantially invalidate fraudulent acts of acquiring predetermined information.

Feature A7. The first control means is
It is determined whether the notification corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode is performed when the predetermined correspondence role is won in the lottery process of the role. Determining means (a function of executing the processing of step S1801 to step S1803, step S1806 to step S1807, step S1810 to step S1812, step S1904 to step S1905, and step S1910 to step S1911 in the main side MPU 72),
Transmission means for transmitting predetermined information when it is determined to execute notification by the determination means (a function for executing the processing of step S1805, step S1809, step S1814, step S1907, and step S1913 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The first notification control means controls the first notification means to execute the first notification based on the fact that the determination means determines to execute the notification.
The second notification control means controls the second notification means to execute the second notification based on the transmission means transmitting the predetermined information. Features A1 to A6 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A7, the first control means collectively determines and executes the first notification in the first notification means and the second notification in the second notification means. As a result, even if bi-directional communication is not performed between the first control unit and the second control unit, the first notification can be executed when the second notification is executed. .

Feature A8. A plurality of types of the predetermined response roles are present by making the contents of the predetermined aspect different so that the corresponding control is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7, wherein the first notification control means causes the first notification to be executed in a mode corresponding to the type of the predetermined correspondence combination.

  According to the feature A8, even in the configuration in which there are a plurality of predetermined correspondence roles, the content of the first notification in the first notification means is checked to grasp the notification content corresponding to the current game round Is possible.

  Feature A9. The first notification control means makes it possible for the player to recognize an aspect for preventing the predetermined aspect and the predetermined aspect from being achieved when the predetermined correspondence part is won in the lottery process of the part. In the situation where the notification is not executed by the second notification means, the first notification means does not execute the notification that enables the player to recognize the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being set. A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that:

  According to the feature A9, the notification that enables the player to recognize the predetermined aspect and the aspect for preventing the predetermined aspect is executed in the first notification means despite the fact that the second notification means is not executed It becomes possible not to go wrong.

Feature A10. The second notification control means executes a notification that enables the player to recognize the predetermined mode and the predetermined mode when the predetermined correspondence combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. A means for controlling the second notification means so as to execute a special notification of what is to be prevented (function to execute the process of step S2005 in the effect side MPU 82),
The first notification control means does not have the predetermined aspect and the predetermined aspect when the predetermined correspondence part is won in the lottery process of the part and the special notification is executed in the second notification part A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, characterized in that a notification for making a player recognizable an aspect to make it not be executed in the first notification means.

  According to the feature A10, in the situation where the notification that the player can recognize the predetermined aspect and the aspect for preventing the predetermined aspect from being executed is not executed but the special notification is executed in the second notification means, the predetermined aspect and It is possible to prevent the notification that the player can recognize the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being executed in the first notification means.

  Characteristics A11. The first notification control means executes a notification corresponding to the situation when the special correspondence is executed in the second notification means when the predetermined correspondence role is won in the lottery process of the role and the second notification means is executed. The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the first notification means is controlled to

  According to the feature A11, even when the special notification is executed in the second notification means, it is possible to confirm whether the special notification is normal or not by confirming the first notification means. Become.

  Feature A12. When both of the first notification in the first notification means and the second notification in the second notification means are executed, the first notification means starts the first notification at a timing after the start of the first notification. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A11, wherein the second notification is started in the 2 notification unit.

  According to the feature A12, by confirming the first notification means at the timing when the second notification is started in the second notification means, it is possible to confirm whether the second notification is legitimate or not. Become.

Feature A13. When the variable display of the pattern is started, means for disabling the operation of stopping the variable display of the pattern over a predetermined period from the start timing is provided.
The first notification control means starts the first notification at the predetermined timing before the predetermined period elapses when the predetermined correspondence role is won in the lottery process of the combination. Yes,
The second notification control means is a timing after the predetermined timing and before the predetermined period elapses when the predetermined correspondence combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. The gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein the game is started by the second notification means.

  According to the feature A13, even if the second notification is started after the timing at which the first notification is started, the second notification can be started in the ineffective period of the stop operation. The player can be made to recognize the content of the second notification before the stop operation is activated.

  Feature A14. When both the first notification in the first notification unit and the second notification in the second notification unit are executed, the first notification is performed after the timing at which the second notification ends in the second notification unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A13, wherein the first notification ends in notification means.

  According to the feature A14, since the first notification does not end before the end of the second notification, it is possible to increase the opportunity to confirm whether the second notification is normal or not. Become.

  Note that for the configuration of the features A1 to A14, the features A1 to A14, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C3, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G17, the features H1 to Any one or more configurations of H5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention concerning the above-mentioned feature A group, it is possible to solve the following subjects.

  As a type of gaming machine, there are known gaming machines and the like which are capable of playing a game similar to a slot machine using a gaming ball instead of a medal as a slot machine or gaming medium. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  With regard to the slot machine, specifically, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are betted, a lottery process of winning is performed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process of the winning combination is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and the control means is operated when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel. At this time, the rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

  As described above, in the gaming machine in which the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the stop operation for the stop button, it is notified that the stop mode of the reel is set to the predetermined mode, and the reel stop operation is performed according to the notification. It is known that the corresponding control is performed. For example, it is known that the stop order of the reels is notified, and by stopping the reels in the order according to the notified stop order, a predetermined winning is achieved, and a medal corresponding to the predetermined winning is paid out. There is. Further, the stop order of the reels is informed, and by stopping the reels in the order according to the informed stop order, a predetermined winning is realized, and a transition of the gaming state corresponding to the predetermined winning occurs. Are known. The notification of such a stop mode is performed by the other control means that has received the information from the control means that executes the lottery process of the above-mentioned winning combination executing notification control.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., control for executing notification of the stop mode needs to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Executes specific processing (start waiting processing, reel control processing) set so that multiple types of processing have a predetermined execution order, temporarily stores information in internal storage means (register of main MPU 72) when processing is executed Control means (main MPU 72) for storing
The control means
Among the plurality of types of processing, the first predetermined process execution means (step S401 to step S411, step S413 to step S415, step S601 to step S602 and step S604 to step S617 of the main MPU 72) for executing the first predetermined process And the like) and
Second predetermined process execution means for executing the second predetermined process among the plurality of types of processes (in the first embodiment, the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the first non-specific control in the main MPU 72) Processing, function to execute second non-specific processing and third non-specific control processing, call processing for non-specific control in main side MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, first non-specific control processing, second non-specific processing And third non-specific control processing),
When the first predetermined process is started, the second predetermined process is started or started without saving the information stored in the internal storage means in the save storage means (stack area 74b for specific control) Save execution means for saving the information stored in the internal storage means to the save storage means (function of executing the processing of step S3002, step S3102 and step S3202 in the main MPU 72, step S3303 in the main MPU 72, A function of executing the processing of step S3309, a function of executing the processing of step S3702 in the main MPU 72, and a function of executing the processing of step S3802 in the main MPU 72);
When the second predetermined process is ended or after it is ended, the return execution means for returning the information saved in the save storage means to the internal storage means (steps S3016, S3111 and S3211 in the main MPU 72) A function to be executed, a function of executing the processing of step S3305 and step S3311 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S3705 in the main MPU 72, and a function of executing the processing of step S3811 in the main MPU 72)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, when the first predetermined process included in the identification process is executed, the evacuation of the information stored in the internal storage means to the evacuation storage means is not executed, but is included in the identification process When the second predetermined process is executed, saving of the information stored in the internal storage means to the save storage means is executed. Thus, when the second predetermined process is performed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage unit from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is performed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is finished, the information saved in the save storage means is returned to the internal storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process ends, it becomes possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. As mentioned above, it becomes possible to perform various control suitably.

  Feature B2. The second predetermined process is either a process executed when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, or a process executed interrupting other processes when an interrupt condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to the feature B1, characterized in that it is not present.

  According to the feature B2, it is stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed even if the supply of the operation power is stopped and the interrupt process is not executed. Information is saved in the save storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage unit from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed, which is different from the second predetermined process. It is possible to improve the accuracy of the information in the internal storage means when the processing of the processing group is executed.

Feature B3. The control means
Interrupt execution means (function of executing interrupt processing in the main MPU 72) that interrupts the specific processing and executes the interrupt processing when an interrupt condition is satisfied;
Setting means for inhibiting the execution of the interrupt process when or after the second predetermined process is started (function to execute the processes of step S3001, step S3101 and step S3201 in the main MPU 72, step S3302 in the main MPU 72, and A function of executing the processing of step S3308, a function of executing the processing of step S3701 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S3801 in the main MPU 72);
A game machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that it comprises:

  According to the feature B3, when the second predetermined process is performed, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited. This makes it possible to prevent further interruption of the process in a situation where the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the save storage means. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent the processing configuration for saving the information stored in the internal storage means from being complicated.

Feature B4. The control means is a third predetermined process execution means for executing a third predetermined process after the second predetermined process is performed as a part of the plurality of types of processes (a second non-operation of the main MPU 72 Function to execute specific control processing),
The setting means permits execution of the interrupt process when or after completing the second predetermined process, and prohibits the execution of the interrupt process when the third predetermined process is started or started. The gaming machine according to the feature B3 characterized by the feature.

  According to the feature B4, in the configuration in which the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited even when the third predetermined process included in the specific process is executed, the execution of the interrupt process is temporarily permitted when the second predetermined process is completed. Thus, when the third predetermined process is performed, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited again. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period during which the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited, and it is possible to secure the opportunity for the interrupt processing to be executed between the second predetermined processing and the third predetermined processing.

Feature B5. The save execution means causes the save storage means to save the information stored in the internal storage means when or after starting the third predetermined process.
The game machine according to feature B4, wherein the return execution means returns the information saved in the save storage means to the internal storage means when or after the third predetermined process is finished.

  According to the feature B5, saving and restoring of the information stored in the internal storage means are individually performed in correspondence with each of the second predetermined process and the third predetermined process. As a result, the information is saved in each of the second predetermined process and the third predetermined process, and the opportunity to execute the interrupt process is secured between the second predetermined process and the third predetermined process. In the configuration, it is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being executed in a situation where the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the save storage means.

Feature B6. The save storage means is
A first save storage unit (specific control stack area 74b) in which the information stored in the internal storage unit is saved when or when the second predetermined process is started;
A second save storage unit (stack area 74d for non-specific control) in which the information stored in the internal storage unit is saved when the second predetermined process ends or ends;
Equipped with
The evacuation execution means is
A unit that saves the information stored in the internal storage unit to the first save storage unit when or after starting the second predetermined process (steps S3002, S3102, and S3202 in the main MPU 72) A function to be executed, a function of executing the processing of step S3303 and step S3309 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S3702 in the main MPU 72, and a function of executing the processing of step S3802 in the main MPU 72)
A unit that saves the information stored in the internal storage unit to the second save storage unit when or after the second predetermined process is completed (the processing of steps S3013, S3108, and S3208 in the main MPU 72 is performed. A function to be executed, a function of executing the processing of step S3405 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S3808 in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
The return execution means is
A unit that restores the information saved in the first save storage unit to the internal storage unit when the second predetermined process is finished or after the process (steps S3016, S3111, and S3211 in the main MPU 72) A function to be executed, a function of executing the processing of step S3305 and step S3311 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S3705 in the main MPU 72, and a function of executing the processing of step S3811 in the main MPU 72)
A unit that restores the information saved in the second save storage unit to the internal storage unit when or after starting the second predetermined process (steps S3005, S3105, and S3205 in the main MPU 72) A function to be executed, a function of executing the processing of step S3403 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S3805 in the main MPU 72),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, comprising:

  According to the feature B6, when the second predetermined process is executed, the information of the internal storage means at that point is not only saved to the first save storage means, but when the second predetermined process is finished, The information of the internal storage means at the point of time is saved to the second save storage means. Thereby, the information stored in the internal storage unit is switched between when the process of the process group corresponding to the first predetermined process is executed and when the process of the process group corresponding to the second predetermined process is executed. It becomes possible to perform appropriately the processing of each processing group.

Feature B7. The control means includes a predetermined storage means (main ROM 73) storing a program required to execute a process.
A program for executing various processes included in the special process group in which the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the save storage means when the process is executed, including the second predetermined process is: An address of an area in which a program for executing various processes included in a predetermined process group which is a process group different from the special process group and which includes the first predetermined process is stored in the predetermined storage means The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B6, wherein the gaming machine is integrated and stored in an area of an address group distinguished from a group.

  According to the feature B7, in the predetermined storage means, the address group of the program for executing the various processes of the predetermined process group and the address group of the program for performing the various processes of the special process group are clearly distinguished. There is. This makes it possible to improve the operability in the case of checking or modifying the program of only one of the predetermined processing group and the special processing group.

  Feature B8. A third process included in the special process group is executed after the first process included in the predetermined process group and before the second process, and a fourth process included in the special process group The gaming machine according to Feature B7, wherein the processing is performed later than the second processing.

  According to feature B8, classification of the predetermined processing group and the special processing group is performed irrespective of the execution order of the processing, and the program address group in the predetermined storage means is clearly distinguished for each classified processing group It is done. This makes it possible to improve the operability in the case of checking and correcting the program for each classified processing group.

Feature B9. It comprises a specific storage means (main RAM 74) in which information is temporarily stored when the control means executes processing.
The specific storage means is included in the area (work area 74a for specific control) used when the process included in the predetermined process group is executed in the control means, and included in the special process group in the control means The area described in the feature B7 or B8 is set such that the area (work area 74c for non-specific control) used when the process is executed is aggregated into different address groups. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B9, the address group of the use area is clearly distinguished for each processing group also in the specific storage unit. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the processing included in the other processing group from being rewritten when the processing included in one processing group is executed.

Feature B10. As the special processing group in which the information stored in the internal storage means is saved to the save storage means when the process is executed, a plurality of types of processes exist besides the second predetermined process,
The control means
Specification means for executing a specific process for specifying which type of process in the special process group is to be executed (function for executing the process of step S3703 in the main MPU 72, step S3806 in the main MPU 72 Function to execute the processing of
Start means (a function of executing the processing of step S3704 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S3807 in the main MPU 72) for starting processing of the type specified by the specific processing;
Equipped with
The save execution means is characterized in that information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the save storage means before the type of processing specified by the specific process is started by the start means. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B9.

  According to the feature B10, when executing the process included in the special process group, the process for saving the information stored in the internal storage means to the save storage means is each of the processes included in the special process group Instead of being executed in step (b), they are collectively executed on the processing side for specifying processing to be executed in the special processing group. This makes it possible to reduce the program capacity as compared with the configuration in which the process for saving is set in each of the processes included in the special process group.

  Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B10, wherein the second predetermined process is a process different from the process for advancing a regular game based on the operation of a player.

  According to the feature B11, when executing processing different from the processing for promoting the regular game based on the operation of the player, the internal storage means used in the processing for promoting the regular game It is possible to prevent information from being rewritten.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B11, the features A1 to A14, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C3, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G17, the features H1 to Any one or more configurations of H5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the group of features B, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are provided with control means such as a CPU, read-only storage means such as a ROM, and read / write storage means such as a RAM. The control means executes processing in accordance with the program read from the read only storage means while writing information to the read / write storage means and reading information from the storage means. When executing this process, information from a sensor or the like is input to the control means, and information from the control means is output to the electric actuator, the light emitting element, or the like. It is also known that control means, read-only storage means, read / write storage means, etc. are integrated into one chip.

  With regard to the slot machine, specifically, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are betted, a lottery process of winning is performed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process of the winning combination is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and the control means is operated when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel. At this time, the rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player. For example, gaming media are provided as the provision of the benefit.

  Here, various controls need to be suitably performed in the gaming machine as illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Control means (main MPU 72) for executing processing;
A predetermined storage unit (main ROM 73) storing a program necessary for executing processing in the control unit;
Equipped with
As processing executed by the control means, a predetermined processing group (processing group corresponding to specific control) including a plurality of types of processing, and a special processing group (processing group corresponding to non-specific control) including a plurality of types of processing Exists,
The program for executing the various processes included in the special process group is distinguished from the address group of the area in which the program for performing the various processes included in the predetermined process group is stored in the predetermined storage unit. A game machine characterized by being collected and stored in an area of a group of addresses.

  According to the feature C1, in the predetermined storage means, the address group of the program for executing the various processes of the predetermined process group and the address group of the program for performing the various processes of the special process group are clearly distinguished There is. This makes it possible to improve the operability in the case of checking or modifying the program of only one of the predetermined processing group and the special processing group.

  Feature C2. A third process included in the special process group is executed after the first process included in the predetermined process group and before the second process, and a fourth process included in the special process group The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the processing is performed later than the second processing.

  According to the feature C2, classification of the predetermined processing group and the special processing group is performed irrespective of the execution order of processing, and the program address group in the predetermined storage means is clearly distinguished for each classified processing group It is done. This makes it possible to improve the operability in the case of checking and correcting the program for each classified processing group.

Feature C3. It comprises a specific storage means (main RAM 74) in which information is temporarily stored when the control means executes processing.
The specific storage means is included in the area (work area 74a for specific control) used when the process included in the predetermined process group is executed in the control means, and included in the special process group in the control means A feature C1 or C2 according to the feature C1 or C2 characterized in that an area (work area 74c for non-specific control) used when processing is executed is set to be aggregated into different address groups. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C3, the address group of the use area is clearly distinguished for each processing group even in the specific storage means. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the processing included in the other processing group from being rewritten when the processing included in one processing group is executed.

  In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features C1 to C3, the features A1 to A14, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C3, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G17, the features H1 to Any one or more configurations of H5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention concerning the above-mentioned feature C group, it is possible to solve the following subjects.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. These gaming machines are provided with control means such as a CPU, read-only storage means such as a ROM, and read / write storage means such as a RAM. The control means executes processing in accordance with the program read from the read only storage means while writing information to the read / write storage means and reading information from the storage means. When executing this process, information from a sensor or the like is input to the control means, and information from the control means is output to the electric actuator, the light emitting element, or the like. It is also known that control means, read-only storage means, read / write storage means, etc. are integrated into one chip.

  With regard to the slot machine, specifically, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are betted, a lottery process of winning is performed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process of the winning combination is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and the control means is operated when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel. At this time, the rotation stop control is executed to stop the rotation of the reel. Then, in the case where the stop result after the stop of the rotation of the reel corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player. For example, gaming media are provided as the provision of the benefit.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is preferable to preferably be able to manage programs for executing various processes, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. An orbiting body (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which plural types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction,
Drive means (stepping motor 33) for rotating the revolving body one round in the predetermined rotation direction as the number of steps when the revolving body moves in a predetermined rotational direction is a predetermined total number by rotating the revolving body When,
Equipped with
The predetermined total number is obtained by totaling the corresponding step number which is the step number corresponding to each of the plurality of types of patterns.
Grasping means for grasping the pattern existing at a predetermined position in the circulating body by using correspondence information corresponding to the number of corresponding steps (step S609 in the main MPU 72 and processing of steps S802 to S809 In the gaming machine provided with the function to
The configuration is not a configuration in which the corresponding step numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of types of patterns are all the same,
The first pattern group (first group) including a predetermined number of patterns continuous in the predetermined rotation direction among the plurality of types of patterns, and the predetermined predetermined in the predetermined rotation direction among the plurality of patterns There is a second pattern group (second group) that includes a number of patterns and does not include the patterns of the first pattern group,
The arrangement mode of the corresponding pattern of the corresponding step number corresponding to the pattern included in the first pattern group, and the alignment of the corresponding pattern number of the corresponding step number corresponding to the pattern included in the second pattern group A game machine characterized in that the arrangement mode matches the predetermined arrangement mode.

  According to the feature D1, the first pattern group and the second pattern group each including a predetermined number of patterns exist, and the arrangement of the patterns of the corresponding steps corresponding to the patterns included in the respective pattern groups Sequence aspects to be matched are identical in a predetermined sequence aspect. As a result, it becomes possible to perform the identification of the corresponding step number in the common process for the pattern included in the first pattern group and the pattern included in the second pattern group. Therefore, in a configuration in which the number of corresponding steps corresponding to each of a plurality of types of designs is not the same, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the number of corresponding steps.

Feature D2. The number of the patterns attached to the orbiting body is a number obtained by integrating an integer of 2 or more into the predetermined number,
The plurality of types of patterns are included in any one pattern group among a plurality of pattern groups (first to fourth groups) including the first pattern group and the second pattern group,
Each of the plurality of pattern groups includes the predetermined number of patterns, and the arrangement mode of the pattern of the corresponding step number corresponds to the predetermined arrangement mode, as described in the feature D1. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D2, a plurality of kinds of patterns attached to the circulating member are included in any of the pattern groups, and the arrangement mode of the corresponding pattern of the corresponding step number corresponding to the pattern included in each pattern group Are identical in a predetermined sequence manner. In this way, by using the processing configuration for specifying the number of corresponding steps corresponding to the patterns included in one pattern group in common for all the pattern groups, all the patterns attached to the circulating member It is possible to specify the number of corresponding steps corresponding to

Feature D3. Design management information (design management data) is set corresponding to each of the plurality of types of design,
The game machine is a step number specifying means for specifying the corresponding step number corresponding to the pattern from the pattern management information corresponding to the pattern which is known to exist at the predetermined position by the grasping means The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2, characterized in that the main MPU 72 has a function of executing the processing of step S811 to step S813.

  According to the feature D3, the pattern management information is used to specify the number of corresponding steps corresponding to each pattern, so the processing configuration for specifying the number of corresponding steps can be simplified. .

Feature D4. The corresponding step number is either the first step number (26 steps) or the second step number (24 steps),
When the predetermined 1 bit in the pattern management information is one of “0” and “1”, the corresponding number of steps to be identified is the first step number, and the predetermined 1 bit in the pattern management information Is the other of “0” and “1”, the corresponding number of steps to be identified is the second number of steps, the gaming machine according to the feature D3.

  According to the feature D4, the number of corresponding steps is only two types, the number of first steps and the number of second steps. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the corresponding step number corresponding to each pattern in a configuration in which the corresponding step numbers corresponding to each of a plurality of types of patterns are not identical. .

  In this case, whether the number of corresponding steps is the number of first steps or the number of second steps is confirmed by confirming whether the predetermined 1 bit in the pattern management information is "0" or "1". It becomes possible to identify. As a result, the amount of information to be referred to for specifying the number of corresponding steps decreases, and the processing configuration for specifying the number of corresponding steps can be simplified.

Feature D5. The number of the patterns attached to the orbiting body is a number obtained by integrating an integer of 2 or more into the predetermined number,
The plurality of types of patterns are included in any one pattern group among a plurality of pattern groups (first to fourth groups) including the first pattern group and the second pattern group,
Each of the plurality of pattern groups includes the predetermined number of patterns, and the order in which the specific type of pattern ("bell" pattern) is arranged in the predetermined rotation direction in the pattern group is the same. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4.

  According to the feature D5, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of patterns attached to the circulating member are included in any of the pattern groups, the arrangement order of the specific types of patterns in each pattern group is the same. This makes it possible to make the mode of stop control for stopping a specific type of pattern at a predetermined position common to the pattern groups.

Feature D6. Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the rotation of the orbiting body;
The rotation of the circulating member is stopped within the range of the maximum slip number with respect to the rotational position of the circulating member at the timing when the stop operating device is operated based on the operation of the stop operating device. Stop control means for controlling the drive means (a function of executing the processing of step S604 to step S611 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the predetermined number is a value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum slip number.

  According to the feature D6, the number of patterns included in each pattern group is a value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum slip number, and the arrangement order of specific types of patterns in each pattern group is the same. In this way, when it is necessary to stop a specific type of pattern at a predetermined position, the specific type of pattern can be stopped at a predetermined position regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means. The above-described excellent effects can be achieved.

Feature D7. Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the rotation of the orbiting body;
When the stop operation means is operated, a pattern to be stopped at the predetermined position is determined based on the pattern existing at the predetermined position at the timing when the stop operation means is operated, and the determined pattern Stop control means (a function of executing the processing of step S604 to step S611 in the main MPU 72) for controlling the drive means so as to stop the above at the predetermined position;
Equipped with
The stop control means uses a stop correspondence information group (slip table) in which stop correspondence information corresponding to each pattern is determined, in order to determine the pattern to be stopped at the predetermined position.
The number of the patterns attached to the orbiting body is a number obtained by integrating an integer of 2 or more into the predetermined number,
The plurality of types of patterns are included in any one pattern group among a plurality of pattern groups including the first pattern group and the second pattern group,
Each of the plurality of pattern groups includes the predetermined number of patterns,
The game machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6, wherein the stop correspondence information corresponding to the predetermined number of symbols is set in the stop correspondence information group.

  According to the feature D7, in the configuration in which plural kinds of patterns attached to the circulating member are included in any of the pattern groups, the stop corresponding information group in which the stop corresponding information corresponding to one pattern group is set It becomes possible to use in common in all pattern groups. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information of the stop correspondence information group.

  Feature D8. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D7, wherein the corresponding step number is one of a first step number (26 steps) and a second step number (24 steps).

  According to the feature D8, the corresponding number of steps is only two types of the first number of steps and the second number of steps. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the number of corresponding steps in a configuration in which the number of corresponding steps corresponding to each of a plurality of types of patterns is not the same.

  Feature D9. In the feature D8, the first step number and the second step number are alternately set for the arrangement of the patterns in the corresponding step number corresponding to the pattern included in each of the pattern groups. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D9, since the pattern corresponding to the first step number and the pattern corresponding to the second step number are alternately arranged in each pattern group, the pattern corresponding to one step number is locally It is possible to prevent them from getting together.

Feature D10. The driving means is a stepping motor that rotates the orbiting body by rotating a rotor by switching an excited phase;
When stopping the pattern corresponding to the first step number at a predetermined position, the circulating member is stopped at the position corresponding to the last step number in the first step number, When stopping the pattern corresponding to the second step number at a predetermined position, the circulating member is stopped at the position corresponding to the last step number in the second step number,
In the feature D8 or D9, the type of phase excitation corresponding to the last step number of the first step number and the type of phase excitation corresponding to the last step number of the second step number are the same. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D10, in the configuration in which two types of the first step number and the second step number are set as the corresponding step number, which of the pattern corresponding to the first step number and the pattern corresponding to the second step number Even in the case of stopping at a predetermined position, the types of phase excitation in the stopped state can be made common. Therefore, even when any pattern is stopped at a predetermined position, the stopped state can be made common.

Feature D11. The driving means is a stepping motor that rotates the orbiting body by rotating a rotor by switching an excited phase;
When the orbiting body rotates at a constant speed, one step is switched from one phase excitation to two phase excitation every time the step number advances by one,
The type of phase excitation corresponding to the first step number of the first step number and the type of phase excitation corresponding to the first step number of the second step number are the same.
The type of phase excitation corresponding to the last step number of the first step number and the type of phase excitation corresponding to the last step number of the second step number are the same The gaming machine according to any one.

  According to the feature D11, regardless of the pattern corresponding to the first step number and the pattern corresponding to the second step number, the type of phase excitation corresponding to the first step number becomes the common start type And the type of phase excitation corresponding to the final number of steps is the common end type. By this, even if the pattern corresponding to the first step number and the pattern corresponding to the second step number are arranged, when the orbiting body rotates at a constant speed, one phase excitation occurs each time the step number advances by one. And two-phase excitation can be configured to be switched from one to the other.

  Feature D12. The gaming machine according to feature D11, wherein a difference between the first number of steps and the second number of steps is “2”.

  According to the feature D12, since the difference between the first step number and the second step number is “2”, the difference between the first step number and the second step number is described in the feature D11 while minimizing the difference. It is possible to achieve excellent effects based on the configuration.

Feature D13. The driving means is a stepping motor that rotates the orbiting body by rotating a rotor by switching an excited phase;
The switching mode of the phase excitation in the case of accelerating the orbiting body is the case where the revolution of the orbiting body is started from the situation where the pattern corresponding to the first step number is stopped at a predetermined position; In one of the features D8 to D12, it is set according to each of the cases where the rotation of the orbiting body is to be started from the situation in which the symbols corresponding to the number are stopped at predetermined positions. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D13, when rotation of the circulating body is started from the situation where the pattern corresponding to the first number of steps is stopped at the predetermined position, and the pattern corresponding to the second number of steps is stopped at the predetermined position It becomes possible to perform acceleration control of the orbiting body in a mode corresponding to each of the cases where the revolution of the orbiting body is started from the existing situation.

Feature D14. The driving means is a stepping motor that rotates the orbiting body by rotating a rotor by switching an excited phase;
The switching mode of the phase excitation in the case of stopping the orbiting body stops the pattern corresponding to the first step number at a predetermined position, and stops the pattern corresponding to the second step number at a predetermined position. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D8 to D13, wherein the gaming machine is set according to each case.

  According to the feature D14, when the pattern corresponding to the first step number is stopped at the predetermined position and when the pattern corresponding to the second step number is stopped at the predetermined position It becomes possible to control.

  Note that for the configuration of the features D1 to D14, the features A1 to A14, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C3, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G17, the features H1 to Any one or more configurations of H5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. An orbiting body (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which plural types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction,
Drive means (stepping motor 33) for rotating the revolving body one round in the predetermined rotation direction as the number of steps when the revolving body moves in a predetermined rotational direction is a predetermined total number by rotating the revolving body When,
Equipped with
The predetermined total number is obtained by totaling the corresponding step number which is the step number corresponding to each of the plurality of types of patterns.
Grasping means for grasping the pattern existing at a predetermined position in the circulating body by using correspondence information corresponding to the number of corresponding steps (step S609 in the main MPU 72 and processing of steps S802 to S809 In the gaming machine provided with the function to
The gaming machine characterized in that the corresponding number of steps is one of a first number of steps (26 steps) and a second number of steps (24 steps).

  According to the feature E1, the corresponding number of steps is only two types, the first number of steps and the second number of steps. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the number of corresponding steps in a configuration in which the number of corresponding steps corresponding to each of a plurality of types of patterns is not the same.

Feature E2. A plurality of pattern groups including a predetermined number of patterns continuous in the predetermined rotation direction among the plurality of types of patterns exist so that the patterns included in the pattern groups do not overlap with different pattern groups. ,
The corresponding number of steps corresponding to a pattern included in each pattern group is set alternately to the number of first steps and the number of second step with respect to the arrangement of the patterns. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature E2, since the pattern corresponding to the first step number and the pattern corresponding to the second step number are alternately arranged in each pattern group, the pattern corresponding to one step number is locally It is possible to avoid getting stuck in the

Feature E3. The driving means is a stepping motor that rotates the orbiting body by rotating a rotor by switching an excited phase;
When stopping the pattern corresponding to the first step number at a predetermined position, the circulating member is stopped at the position corresponding to the last step number in the first step number, When stopping the pattern corresponding to the second step number at a predetermined position, the circulating member is stopped at the position corresponding to the last step number in the second step number,
The feature E1 or E2 is characterized in that the type of phase excitation corresponding to the last step number of the first step number and the type of phase excitation corresponding to the last step number of the second step number are the same. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature E3, in the configuration in which two types of the first step number and the second step number are set as the number of steps corresponding to a plurality of types of pattern, in the pattern corresponding to the first number of steps and the second number of steps Even when any of the corresponding patterns is stopped at a predetermined position, the type of phase excitation in the stopped state can be made common. Therefore, even when any pattern is stopped at a predetermined position, the stopped state can be made common.

Feature E4. The driving means is a stepping motor that rotates the orbiting body by rotating a rotor by switching an excited phase;
When the orbiting body rotates at a constant speed, one step is switched from one phase excitation to two phase excitation every time the step number advances by one,
The type of phase excitation corresponding to the first step number of the first step number and the type of phase excitation corresponding to the first step number of the second step number are the same.
The type of phase excitation corresponding to the last step number of the first step number and the type of phase excitation corresponding to the last step number of the second step number are the same The gaming machine according to any one.

  According to the feature E4, regardless of the pattern corresponding to the first step number and the pattern corresponding to the second step number, the type of phase excitation corresponding to the first step number becomes the common start type And the type of phase excitation corresponding to the final number of steps is the common end type. By this, even if the pattern corresponding to the first step number and the pattern corresponding to the second step number are arranged, when the orbiting body rotates at a constant speed, one phase excitation occurs each time the step number advances by one. And two-phase excitation can be configured to be switched from one to the other.

  Feature E5. The game machine according to Feature E4, wherein a difference between the first number of steps and the second number of steps is “2”.

  According to the feature E5, since the difference between the first step number and the second step number is “2”, the difference between the first step number and the second step number is described as the feature E4 while minimizing the difference. It is possible to achieve excellent effects based on the configuration.

Feature E6. The driving means is a stepping motor that rotates the orbiting body by rotating a rotor by switching an excited phase;
The switching mode of the phase excitation in the case of accelerating the orbiting body is the case where the revolution of the orbiting body is started from the situation where the pattern corresponding to the first step number is stopped at a predetermined position; In any one of the features E1 to E5, it is set according to each of the cases where the rotation of the orbiting body is started from the situation where the pattern corresponding to the number is stopped at the predetermined position. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature E6, when rotation of the orbiting body is started from the situation where the pattern corresponding to the first number of steps is stopped at the predetermined position, and the pattern corresponding to the second number of steps is stopped at the predetermined position It becomes possible to perform acceleration control of the orbiting body in a mode corresponding to each of the cases where the revolution of the orbiting body is started from the existing situation.

Feature E7. The driving means is a stepping motor that rotates the orbiting body by rotating a rotor by switching an excited phase;
The switching mode of the phase excitation in the case of stopping the orbiting body stops the pattern corresponding to the first step number at a predetermined position, and stops the pattern corresponding to the second step number at a predetermined position. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E6, which is set to correspond to each case.

  According to the feature E7, when the pattern corresponding to the first number of steps is stopped at the predetermined position and when the pattern corresponding to the second number of steps is stopped at the predetermined position It becomes possible to control.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A14, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C3, the feature D1 to D14, the feature E1 to E7, the feature F1 to F8, the feature G1 to G17, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature E1 to E7. Any one or more configurations of H5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A plurality of orbiting bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A plurality of drive means (stepping motors 33) provided corresponding to the respective orbiting bodies and rotating the corresponding orbiting bodies;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the respective orbiting bodies and operated to stop the rotation of the corresponding orbiting bodies;
Stop control means (steps S604 to S614 in the main side MPU 72 and control means for controlling the drive means corresponding to the rotating body so as to stop the rotating body corresponding to the stop operation means when the stop operation means is operated) A function of executing the processing of step S707 to step S711),
In a gaming machine provided with
The stop control means is
Operation corresponding means for executing an operation corresponding process necessary to start the stop control of the orbiting body corresponding to the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means (step S607 to step in the main side MPU 72 Function to execute the processing of S611),
In the situation where there are a specific number or more of target circulating bodies before completion which is the status before the completion of stop that is the situation after the operation response processing is executed and the stop control is not completed. When the stop operation means corresponding to the orbiting object to which the operation corresponding process has not been executed yet is operated, the operation corresponding process is not executed on the orbiting object to which the operation before the operation is applied. Processing control means (function of executing effective operation determination processing in the main MPU 72);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature F1, on the condition that there are a specific number or more of the target circulating bodies before completion that are in the status before stopping completion, for the stop operation corresponding to the target circulating bodies before operation It will be in the state where operation corresponding processing is not performed. Thus, for example, when the operation response process is executed, the operation is suspended after the operation response process is executed, unlike the configuration in which the stop operation on the circulating body before the operation is invalidated over the predetermined predetermined period. It is possible to prevent the stop operation on the target circulating body before the operation from being invalidated even though there is no circulating body in a situation where the control is not completed. Therefore, it becomes possible to shorten the shortest period required until all the orbiting bodies stop.

  On the other hand, when there is a specific number or more of the target circulating bodies before completion that are in the status before stopping completion, even if the stopping operation is performed on the target circulating bodies before operation, the operation is before the operation. The operation response process is not performed on the target circulating body. As a result, it is possible to suppress the number of circulating bodies in the situation before the completion of the stop to a specific number, and it is possible to reduce the processing load of the stop control.

  Feature F2. A unit for canceling the state restricted so that the operation corresponding processing is not performed when the stop control on the target revolving object before completion is completed (function to execute the processing of step S1003 in the main MPU 72, main side It has a function to execute the processing of step S1106 in the MPU 72, a function to execute the processing of step S1203 in the main MPU 72, and a function to execute the processing of step S1303 in the main MPU 72. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature F2, the stop operation on the circulating body before the operation is invalidated even though there is no circulating body in a state after the operation corresponding process is executed and the stop control is not completed. It is possible to avoid being done. Therefore, it becomes possible to shorten the shortest period required until all the orbiting bodies stop.

Feature F3. The driving means is a stepping motor that rotates the orbiting body by rotating a rotor by switching an excited phase;
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized in that a situation occurs in which a larger number of phases are excited at the same time than when rotating the orbiting body at a constant speed when the orbiting body is stopped.

  According to the feature F3, when the rotating body is stopped, a situation occurs in which a larger number of phases are excited simultaneously than in the case where the rotating body is rotated at a constant speed; It becomes possible to perform drive control of the drive means in a mode suitable for each of the cases where the rotating body is stopped.

  In this case, in a configuration in which a greater number of phases are excited at the same time than when rotating at a constant speed when stopping the rotating body, the larger the number of rotating bodies in the pre-stop completion state is simultaneously The total number of excited phases will be greater than in the case of constant speed rotation. On the other hand, when the configuration has the above-mentioned feature F1 and there is a specific number or more of the target circulating bodies before completion which is in the status before stopping completion, the operation stops at the target circulating bodies before operation. Even if an operation is performed, the operation response process is not performed on the target circulating body before the operation. This makes it possible to set the total number of simultaneously excited phases to a certain number.

Feature F4. The stop control means is
A stop pattern for stopping at a predetermined position so as to be within the range of the maximum slip number with respect to the rotational position of the orbiting body at the timing when the stop operation means is operated based on the operation of the stop operation means (A function of executing the processing of step S611 in the main MPU 72)
The predetermined stop control process is not performed until the stop image reaches the predetermined rotational position, and the predetermined stop position is the rotational position at which the stop image can be stopped at the predetermined position. A unit that executes stop control processing (a function of executing the processing of steps S612 to S614 and steps S707 to S711 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F3, wherein the situation before the completion of the stop is obtained when the operation corresponding process is executed.

  In the configuration in which the slip number can be set when stopping the circulating body, even if the circulating body has been subjected to the operation response process, the state before the predetermined stop control process is executed and the predetermined stop control process are executed. And the state after being done will exist. In this case, the operation response processing is executed when it is specified whether or not there is a target circulating object before completion by the configuration before the stop completion when the operation response processing is executed. It is only necessary to specify whether or not there is a rotating body after the operation, and it is not necessary to specify whether or not the stop control has not been completed after the operation handling process has been executed. . Therefore, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying whether or not there is a target circulating body before completion.

Feature F5. Three or more of the orbiting members are provided,
When the stop operation means corresponding to the orbiting object before the operation is operated in a situation where the orbiting object targeted before the completion is less than the specific number, the processing restriction means orbits the object before the manipulation Means for permitting execution of the operation corresponding process to the body (function to make a negative determination in step S1005 in the main MPU 72, function to make a negative determination in step S1109 in the main MPU 72, negative in step S1205 in the main MPU 72 The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F4, characterized in that it has a function of determining.

  According to the feature F5, even in a situation where there is a target circulating body before completion, if the number of target circulating bodies before completion is less than the specified number, the operation corresponding process for the target rotating body before operation Execution is permitted. As a result, it becomes possible that a plurality of target circulating bodies exist simultaneously before completion, and it is possible to shorten the shortest period required for stopping all the circulating bodies.

Feature F6. The stop control means is
A stop pattern for stopping at a predetermined position so as to be within the range of the maximum slip number with respect to the rotational position of the orbiting body at the timing when the stop operation means is operated based on the operation of the stop operation means (A function of executing the processing of step S611 in the main MPU 72)
The predetermined stop control process is not performed until the stop image reaches the predetermined rotational position, and the predetermined stop position is the rotational position at which the stop image can be stopped at the predetermined position. A unit that executes stop control processing (a function of executing the processing of steps S612 to S614 and steps S707 to S711 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The process restricting means, when there is a circulating body in a situation after the operation corresponding process is performed and before the predetermined stop control process is performed, the circulating body of the target before completion is the process Even if the stop operation means corresponding to the orbiting object before the operation is operated in a situation where there is less than a specified number, the operation corresponding processing is not performed on the orbiting object before the operation. The gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized in that

  According to the feature F6, even in a situation where there is a target circulating body before completion, if the number of target circulating bodies before completion is less than a specific number, execution of the operation corresponding process on the target circulating body before operation In the case where there is a rotating body in a situation after the operation corresponding process is executed and before the predetermined stop control process is executed, even if the configuration is permitted, Execution of the operation corresponding process to the circulating body is blocked. Thus, for example, due to the fact that the number of slips of the orbiting body on which the stopping operation was performed is larger than the slippage number of the orbiting body on which the stopping operation was performed first, the latter orbiting body is more than the former It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that the user stops earlier.

Feature F7. The stop control means is
A stop pattern for stopping at a predetermined position so as to be within the range of the maximum slip number with respect to the rotational position of the orbiting body at the timing when the stop operation means is operated based on the operation of the stop operation means (A function of executing the processing of step S611 in the main MPU 72)
The predetermined stop control process is not performed until the stop image reaches the predetermined rotational position, and the predetermined stop position is the rotational position at which the stop image can be stopped at the predetermined position. A unit that executes stop control processing (a function of executing the processing of steps S612 to S614 and steps S707 to S711 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F6, wherein the situation before the completion of the stop is achieved when the predetermined stop control process is executed.

  According to the feature F7, even if the operation corresponding process is performed, the predetermined stop control process is performed without being the state before the stop completion, and the state before the stop completion is performed. As a result, the situation before the predetermined stop control process is executed after the operation handling process is performed is not the status of the target for restricting the execution of the operation handling process, so the execution of the operation handling process is permitted. Period can be secured for a long time.

Feature F8. The process control means is
In the predetermined stop control process in the case where the circulating body before the operation becomes the execution target of the operation corresponding processing based on the fact that the stopping operation means corresponding to the circulating body before the operation is operated Start specifying means (a function of executing the processing of step S1206 in the main MPU 72) for specifying the start timing;
In the case where the start timing specified by the start specifying means is a timing to cause a situation where the number of target circulating bodies before completion is “specific number + 1”, the operation on the target circulating front before operation A unit (a function of executing the processing of step S1207 in the main MPU 72) for preventing the corresponding processing from being executed;
The gaming machine according to feature F7, comprising:

  According to the feature F8, even if the stop operation means corresponding to the rotating object before the operation is operated in a situation where the number of rotating objects before the completion is a specified number or more, the rotation of the object before the operation If the situation where the number of target circulating bodies before completion is “specific number + 1” does not occur when the operation corresponding process is performed on the body, the operation corresponding process is performed for the target circulating body before the operation To be executed. As a result, it is possible to secure a long period during which the execution of the operation corresponding process is permitted while preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the number of target circulating bodies before completion is “specific number + 1”.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A14, the feature B1 to B11, the feature C1 to C3, the feature D1 to D14, the feature E1 to E7, the feature F1 to F8, the feature G1 to G17, the feature H1 to the configuration of the feature F1 to F8 Any one or more configurations of H5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature D group, the feature E group, and the feature F group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  As a type of gaming machine, there is a slot machine. The slot machine is provided with a plurality of reels, and a part of a plurality of symbols applied to the outer peripheral portion of each of the reels is configured to be visible through a display window. Then, the player bets game media such as medals and operates the start lever to start rotation of each reel, and after the reels start rotation, the reels are sequentially stopped by operating the stop button.

  Further, inside the slot machine, a lottery is made on the condition that the bet of the game medium and the operation of the start lever are operated, and the result of the lottery is winning, and the symbol on which the player is elected on the preset effective line is displayed. A predetermined number of gaming media may be paid out on condition of stopping.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., a configuration capable of suitably performing stop control of a pattern such as the above-mentioned symbol is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values (a function for executing the processing of step S2402 in the main MPU 72, a function for executing the processing in step S2502 in the main MPU 72, a step in the main MPU 72 A function of executing the process of S2602, a function of executing the process of step S2702 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S2802 in the main MPU 72);
Progress control means (a function of executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the progress of the game to have an advantage corresponding to the setting value of the object to be used;
In a gaming machine provided with
An effect control means (step in the main MPU 72) which causes a predetermined effect (ending effect) to be executed when a predetermined trigger occurs, and sequentially changes the type of the predetermined effect to be executed each time the predetermined trigger occurs. A function of executing the processing of S2204 to step S2209, a function of executing the ending display control processing of the effect side MPU 82, a function of executing the processing of step S2904 to step S2911 of the main MPU 72);
When the setting value of the use object is changed, the type of the predetermined effect executed after the change is made violates the regularity of the change mode of the type of the predetermined effect before the change is performed. At the time of change control means to become a type (function to execute the processing of step S2404 in the main MPU 72, function to execute the processing of step S2504 in the main MPU 72, and execute processing of step S2606 and step S2608 in the main MPU 72 Function to execute the processing of step S2705 and step S2706 in the main MPU 72, and the function to execute the processing of step S2804 to step S2807 in the main MPU 72);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, not only the predetermined effect is executed when the predetermined trigger occurs, but also the type of the predetermined effect to be executed is sequentially changed every time the predetermined trigger occurs, so the execution mode of the predetermined effect Can be diversified, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, when the setting value of the object to be used is changed, the type of the predetermined effect to be executed after the change is made is the regularity of the change mode of the type of the predetermined effect before the change is performed. It can be a contrary type. Thereby, it becomes easy to predict whether or not the setting value of the usage target has been changed by confirming the type of the predetermined effect before and after the situation where the setting value of the usage target can be changed. Therefore, the degree of attention to the predetermined effect can be increased, and it becomes possible to give motivation to play a game with this gaming machine.

  Feature G2. A game machine according to feature G1, characterized in that when the game machine is switched from the power-off state to the power-on state, the setting value of the object to be used can be changed by the setting means.

  One business day of the game hall by applying the configuration described in the feature G1 to the configuration that becomes possible when the setting value of the object of use changes from the power-off state of the gaming machine to the power-on state It is possible to give motivation to play a game with this gaming machine at each of the last and next business day.

Feature G3. An information storage unit that stores information that can specify the type of the predetermined effect to be executed when the predetermined trigger newly occurs, and that can store and hold the information when the operation power is supplied. (Main RAM 74),
Power interruption means (power supply device 54) during interruption which supplies operation power to the information storage means while the game machine is interrupted;
The gaming machine according to feature G2, comprising:

  According to the feature G3, the operating power is supplied to the information storage means even while the game machine is switched off, so the type of the predetermined effect to be executed on the predetermined business day is the business day before that. It becomes possible to set it as the kind according to the regularity of the change mode of the kind of predetermined production. In this case, if the setting value to be used is changed when the gaming machine is switched from the power-off state to the power-on state, the type of the predetermined effect to be executed on the predetermined business day is the business before that. It may be a type contrary to the regularity of the change aspect of the type of the predetermined effect in the day. This makes it possible to give motivation to play a game with this gaming machine on the last of the business day of the game hall and the first of the next business day.

  Feature G4. The change-time control means is configured to set the type of the predetermined effect to be executed after the change of the setting value of the object to be used, with respect to the type of the predetermined effect which is finally executed before the change is performed. The game according to any one of the features G1 to G3 characterized in that the kind of the next order according to the change order of the type of the predetermined effect before the change is made can be different from the kind of the next order Machine.

  According to the feature G4, when the setting value of the use target is changed, the type of the predetermined effect performed after the change is to the type of the predetermined effect performed last before the change is performed. It may be a different type from the next order type according to the change order of the predetermined effect type before the change is performed. Thus, a player who wants information on predicting whether the setting value of the use object has been changed pays attention to the types of predetermined effects before and after the situation where the setting value of the use object may be changed. At the same time, attention is also paid to the change order of the type of the predetermined effect before the situation in which the setting value of the object to be used may be changed. Therefore, it becomes possible to give motivation to continue playing a game with this gaming machine.

  Feature G5. The change-time control means is configured to set the type of the predetermined effect to be performed first after the change of the setting value of the use object is made to be a predetermined type. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

  According to the feature G5, when the set value of the use target is changed, the set value of the use target is changed because the type of the predetermined effect to be executed first after the change is made becomes the predetermined type. It is possible to predict whether the possibility that the setting value to be used has been changed is high by confirming whether or not the type of the predetermined effect performed after the possible situation is the predetermined type. Become. In addition, in a situation where it is confirmed that the type of the predetermined effect before the setting value of the use object is changed is not the order in front of the predetermined type, the setting value of the use object is executed after the situation may be changed. When the type of the predetermined effect becomes the predetermined type, the possibility that the setting value to be used is changed is dramatically increased. Therefore, even with this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the type of the predetermined effect performed before the situation in which the setting value of the object to be used can be changed.

Feature G6. An information storage unit (main RAM 74) for storing information that enables identification of the type of the predetermined effect to be executed when the predetermined trigger newly occurs;
Initialization means (a function of executing the processing of step S104 in the main MPU 72) for initializing the information stored in the information storage means;
Equipped with
The configuration may be configured to change the setting value of the use target when a predetermined situation occurs, and the initialization unit may perform initialization when the predetermined situation occurs.
When initialization of the information stored in the information storage unit is performed by the initialization unit, the type of the predetermined effect to be initially executed may be the predetermined type. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature G6, the type of the predetermined effect to be executed thereafter may be the predetermined type not only when the setting value of the use object is changed but also when the information storage unit is initialized. As a result, the player who confirms that the type of the predetermined effect has become the predetermined type after the predetermined situation is reached is that the trigger is a change of the set value of the object to be used, and the initialization of the information storage means The game will be played while predicting which is it. Therefore, while it is easy to predict the presence or absence of the change of the setting value by confirming the type of the predetermined effect, it is possible to prevent the user from clearly understanding that the setting value to be used has been changed. Become.

  Feature G7. The change-time control means changes the type of the predetermined effect to be executed after the change according to the type of the predetermined effect last executed before the setting value of the use object is changed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G6, characterized in that the type of the predetermined effect is determined.

  According to the feature G7, the type of the predetermined effect to be executed after the change of the setting value of the object to be used fluctuates according to the type of the predetermined effect performed before the change of the setting value of the object to be used. It becomes possible to diversify the types of predetermined effects to be executed after the change of the set value of.

  Feature G8. The change-time control means is configured to set the type of the predetermined effect to be executed after the change of the setting value of the object to be used, with respect to the type of the predetermined effect which is finally executed before the change is performed. The type of the order after a specific number of minutes which is a number of “2” or more according to the change order of the type of the predetermined effect before the change is performed, of the features G1 to G7 The gaming machine according to any one.

  According to the feature G8, even if the type of the predetermined effect performed before the change of the setting value of the use object is any, the type of the predetermined effect performed after the change of the setting value of the use object is the predetermined value It becomes possible to make it a kind contrary to the regularity of the change aspect of the kind of presentation. Thus, a player who wants information on predicting whether the setting value of the use object has been changed pays attention to the types of predetermined effects before and after the situation where the setting value of the use object may be changed. At the same time, attention is also paid to the change order of the type of the predetermined effect before the situation in which the setting value of the object to be used may be changed. Therefore, it becomes possible to give motivation to continue playing a game with this gaming machine.

Feature G9. An information storage unit (main RAM 74) for storing information that enables identification of the type of the predetermined effect to be executed when the predetermined trigger newly occurs;
Initialization means (a function of executing the processing of step S104 in the main MPU 72) for initializing the information stored in the information storage means;
Equipped with
The configuration may be configured to change the setting value of the use target when a predetermined situation occurs, and the initialization unit may perform initialization when the predetermined situation occurs.
When initialization of the information stored in the information storage unit is performed by the initialization unit, the type of the predetermined effect to be first executed thereafter may be a predetermined type. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature G9, a situation is generated in which the type of the predetermined effect to be executed subsequently differs between when the setting value of the object to be used is changed and when the initialization of the information storage unit is executed. Is possible. Thereby, there may occur a situation where it can be clearly understood that the change of the setting value to be used has been made by confirming the type of the predetermined effect before and after the predetermined situation. Therefore, it becomes possible to give motivation to continue playing a game with this gaming machine.

  Feature G10. The change-time control means is characterized in that the type of the predetermined effect to be executed after the change of the setting value of the use object is performed is a type corresponding to the change degree of the setting value of the use object. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G9.

  According to the feature G10, when the setting value to be used is changed, the type of the predetermined effect to be executed subsequently is determined to be the type corresponding to the change degree of the setting value to be used. By checking the type of the predetermined effect before and after the change of the setting value, it is possible to predict not only the change of the setting value of the use object but also the change degree of the setting value of the use object. Therefore, it becomes possible to give motivation to continue playing a game with this gaming machine.

  Feature G11. The change-time control means is configured to compare the type of the predetermined effect to be executed after the change of the setting value of the object to be used, with respect to the type of the predetermined effect performed last before the change is performed. A game machine according to Feature G10, characterized in that the execution order is shifted by an amount corresponding to the change degree of the setting value to be used.

  According to the feature G11, the change of the setting value of the use object is made by confirming the type of the predetermined effect before and after the situation where the setting value of the use object may be changed and grasping the deviation amount of the type of the predetermined effect. It is possible to predict the degree. Therefore, it becomes possible to raise the attention to the predetermined effect.

Feature G12. The change control means is
First change control means for determining the type of the predetermined effect to be executed after the change is made according to the first determination mode when the set value of the use object is changed to the side where the degree of advantage increases A function of executing the processing of step S2606 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S2705 in the main MPU 72);
A second change control means for determining the type of the predetermined effect to be executed after the change is made when the set value of the use object is changed to the side where the advantage is lowered, A function of executing the process of step S2608 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S2706 in the main MPU 72);
A game machine according to feature G10 or G11, comprising:

  According to the feature G12, when the setting value to be used is changed to the side where the degree of advantage increases, the type of the predetermined effect after the change is determined in the corresponding mode, and the side to which the degree of advantage decreases When the setting value to be used is changed, the type of the predetermined effect after the change is determined in a corresponding manner. As a result, by confirming the type of the predetermined effect before and after the change of the setting value of the object to be used, not only the change of the setting value of the object to be used but also the setting value of the object to be used It becomes possible to grasp which one of them was changed. Therefore, it becomes possible to raise the attention to the predetermined effect.

Feature G13. The configuration is such that the advantage is higher as the setting value of the target to be used is larger.
The first change time control means changes the type of the predetermined effect to be executed after the change when the set value of the use object is changed to the side where the degree of advantage increases. With respect to the type of the predetermined effect performed last before being executed, the execution order deviates according to the predetermined order by an amount corresponding to the difference between the setting value of the use target before the change with respect to the setting value of the use target after the change. Decided on the
The second change control means changes the type of the predetermined effect to be executed after the change when the set value of the use mode is changed to the side where the degree of advantage decreases. The order of the reverse of the predetermined order by the amount corresponding to the difference between the setting value of the object to be used after the change to the setting value of the use mode before the change with respect to the type of the predetermined effect last executed before being The gaming machine according to feature G12, wherein the type is determined to be out of order according to the execution order.

  According to the feature G13, by confirming the type of the predetermined effect before and after the change of the setting value of the object to be used, only to which of the high side and the low side the setting value of the object to be used is changed Instead, it is possible to predict how much the setting value has been changed. Therefore, it becomes possible to raise the attention to the predetermined effect.

  Feature G14. The type of the predetermined effect determined by the first change control unit and the type of the predetermined effect determined by the second change control unit may be the same type, as described in the feature G13. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature G14, the type of the predetermined effect to be executed thereafter becomes the same type when the setting value of the object to be used is changed to the side with high degree of advantage and to the side with low degree of advantage. By obtaining, even after confirming the type of the predetermined effect before and after the change of the setting value of the object to be used, the player grasps whether the setting value of the object to be used is changed to the higher side or the lower side. It is possible to create an impossible situation. Thereby, although it is easy to predict whether the setting value to be used has been changed to the high side or the low side by confirming the type of the predetermined effect, it is clearly determined which one has been changed. It is possible to prevent people from

  Feature G15. When the setting value of the object to be used is changed, the change time control means changes the change order of the type of the predetermined effect after the change is performed, before the change is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G14, wherein the order is different from the changing order.

  According to the feature G15, the change order of the type of the predetermined effect is changed by changing the setting value to be used. Thereby, it becomes possible to predict the presence or absence of the change of the setting value of the use target by confirming the change order of the type of the predetermined effect before and after the situation where the setting value of the use target may be changed. In addition, since the change order is changed, the presence or absence of the change in the setting value to be used can be surely grasped by confirming the change order before and after the situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed. Is possible. In addition, since it is necessary to check a plurality of predetermined effects in order to understand the change order, before and after the situation in which the setting value of the use object may be changed to grasp the presence or absence of the change of the setting value of the use object It is necessary to check the predetermined effect a plurality of times in each of. Therefore, it becomes possible to give motivation to continue playing a game with this gaming machine.

  Feature G16. When the setting value of the object to be used is changed, the change time control means changes the change order of the type of the predetermined effect after the change is performed, before the change is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature G15, characterized in that the order is reverse to the change order.

  According to the feature G16, since the change order of the type of the predetermined effect is changed to the reverse order when the setting value of the use object is changed, two patterns of the change order of the type of the predetermined effect are prepared It is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects only by itself.

  Feature G17. Even when the change order is changed, the change time control means lasts the type of the predetermined effect to be executed after the change of the setting value of the object to be used before the change is performed. In the change order before the change of the setting value of the use object is performed, the next order type is determined with respect to the type of the predetermined effect performed in the second aspect, as described in the feature G15 or G16. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature G17, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the change of the type of the predetermined effect has been made even if the type of the first predetermined effect is confirmed after the situation where the setting value of the object to be used can be changed It will be possible to As a result, in order to grasp the presence or absence of the change of the setting value to be used, it is necessary to check the predetermined effect a plurality of times after the situation where the setting value to be used can be changed. Therefore, it becomes possible to give motivation to continue playing a game with this gaming machine.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G17, the features A1 to A14, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C3, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G17, the features H1 to Any one or more configurations of H5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values (a function for executing the processing of step S2402 in the main MPU 72, a function for executing the processing in step S2502 in the main MPU 72, a step in the main MPU 72 A function of executing the process of S2602, a function of executing the process of step S2702 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S2802 in the main MPU 72);
Progress control means (a function of executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the progress of the game to have an advantage corresponding to the setting value of the object to be used;
In a gaming machine provided with
An effect control means (step in the main MPU 72) which causes a predetermined effect (ending effect) to be executed when a predetermined trigger occurs, and sequentially changes the type of the predetermined effect to be executed each time the predetermined trigger occurs. A function of executing the processing of S2204 to step S2209, a function of executing the ending display control processing of the effect side MPU 82, a function of executing the processing of step S2904 to step S2911 of the main MPU 72);
When the setting value of the use object is changed, the change order of the type of the predetermined effect after the change is performed is different from the change order of the type of the predetermined effect before the change is performed. Changing time control means (function of executing the processing of step S2804 to step S2807 in the main MPU 72);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, not only the predetermined effect is executed when the predetermined trigger occurs, but also the type of the predetermined effect to be executed is sequentially changed each time the predetermined trigger occurs. Can be diversified, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, the change order of the type of the predetermined effect is changed by changing the setting value to be used. Thereby, it becomes possible to predict the presence or absence of the change of the setting value of the use target by confirming the change order of the type of the predetermined effect before and after the situation where the setting value of the use target may be changed. In addition, since the change order is changed, the presence or absence of the change in the setting value to be used can be surely grasped by confirming the change order before and after the situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed. Is possible. In addition, since it is necessary to check a plurality of predetermined effects in order to understand the change order, before and after the situation in which the setting value of the use object may be changed to grasp the presence or absence of the change of the setting value of the use object It is necessary to check the predetermined effect a plurality of times in each of. Therefore, it becomes possible to give motivation to continue playing a game with this gaming machine.

  Feature H2. The gaming machine according to the feature H1, characterized in that the setting value of the object to be used by the setting means is changed when the gaming machine is switched from the power-off state to the power-on state.

  One business day of the game hall by applying the configuration described in the feature H1 to the configuration that becomes possible when the change of the setting value of the use object is changed from the power-off state of the gaming machine to the power-on state It is possible to give motivation to play a game with this gaming machine at each of the last and next business day.

Feature H3. An information storage unit that stores information that can specify the type of the predetermined effect to be executed when the predetermined trigger newly occurs, and that can store and hold the information when the operation power is supplied. (Main RAM 74),
Power interruption means (power supply device 54) during interruption which supplies operation power to the information storage means while the game machine is interrupted;
The gaming machine according to feature H2, comprising:

  According to the feature H3, since the operation power is supplied to the information storage means even while the game machine is powered off, the type of the predetermined effect to be executed in the predetermined business day is the same as the business day before that. It becomes possible to set it as the kind according to the regularity of the change mode of the kind of predetermined production. In this case, if the setting value to be used is changed when the gaming machine is switched from the power-off state to the power-on state, the type of the predetermined effect to be executed on the predetermined business day is the business before that. It may be a type contrary to the regularity of the change aspect of the type of the predetermined effect in the day. This makes it possible to give motivation to play a game with this gaming machine on the last of the business day of the game hall and the first of the next business day.

  Feature H4. When the setting value of the object to be used is changed, the change time control means changes the change order of the type of the predetermined effect after the change is performed, before the change is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H3, characterized in that the order is reverse to the change order.

  According to the feature H4, since the change order of the type of the predetermined effect is changed to the reverse order when the setting value of the use object is changed, two patterns of the change order of the type of the predetermined effect are prepared It is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects only by itself.

  Feature H5. Even when the change order is changed, the change time control means lasts the type of the predetermined effect to be executed after the change of the setting value of the object to be used before the change is performed. Any one of the features H1 to H4 characterized in that, with respect to the type of the predetermined effect performed in the step, the type of the next order is determined in the change order before the setting value of the use object is changed. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature H5, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the change of the type of the predetermined effect has been performed even if the type of the first predetermined effect is confirmed after the situation where the setting value of the object to be used can be changed It will be possible to As a result, in order to grasp the presence or absence of the change of the setting value to be used, it is necessary to check the predetermined effect a plurality of times after the situation where the setting value to be used can be changed. Therefore, it becomes possible to give motivation to continue playing a game with this gaming machine.

  Note that for the configuration of the features H1 to H5, the features A1 to A14, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C3, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F8, the features G1 to G17, the features H1 to Any one or more configurations of H5 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature G group and the feature H group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a type of gaming machine, there is a slot machine. The slot machine is provided with a plurality of reels, and a part of a plurality of symbols applied to the outer peripheral portion of each of the reels is configured to be visible through a display window. Then, the player bets game media such as medals and operates the start lever to start rotation of each reel, and after the reels start rotation, the reels are sequentially stopped by operating the stop button.

  Further, inside the slot machine, a lottery is made on the condition that the bet of the game medium and the operation of the start lever are operated, and the result of the lottery is winning, and the symbol on which the player is elected on the preset effective line is displayed. A predetermined number of gaming media may be paid out on condition of stopping.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above etc., it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied will be shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: Start rotation of the orbiter based on the operation of the start operation means, stop rotation of the orbiter based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player according to the pattern after the stop A gaming machine that grants benefits.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Slot machine, 31 ... Reel unit, 32L, 32M, 32R ... Reel, 33 ... Stepping motor, 41 ... Start lever, 42-44 ... Stop button, 47-49 ... Credit insertion button, 63 ... Image display apparatus, 67 ... special display unit, 72 ... main side MPU, 73 ... main side ROM, 74 ... main side RAM, 74a ... work area for specific control, 74b ... stack area for specific control, 74c ... work area for non-specific control 74d: Stack area for nonspecific control 82: MPU on the effect side.

Claims (2)

A control unit that executes a plurality of types of processing and temporarily stores information in the internal storage unit when the processing is performed;
Predetermined storage means for storing a program necessary for executing processing in the control means;
Equipped with
The control means
First predetermined process execution means for executing a first predetermined process of the plurality of types of processes;
Second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process of the plurality of types of processes;
Information stored in the internal storage means when starting the second predetermined process without evacuating the information stored in the internal storage means when the first predetermined process is started Save execution means for saving the data into the save storage means;
Return execution means for returning the information saved in the save storage means to the internal storage means when or after completing the second predetermined process;
Equipped with
The first predetermined process is executed when the interrupt process is started based on the establishment of the interrupt condition,
When starting the second predetermined process from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited in the first predetermined process before the second predetermined process is started, When ending the second predetermined process and returning to the first predetermined process, the execution of the interrupt process is permitted in the returned first predetermined process, and the execution of the interrupt process is permitted in the second predetermined process. It is not possible to
In the first predetermined process, a process for advancing a game is executed,
In the second predetermined process, a process different from the process for advancing the game is executed,
The second predetermined process includes a management process for performing a predetermined management, and a notification process for performing a notice corresponding to the result of the management process.
The save storage means includes a first save storage means provided corresponding to the first predetermined process, and a second save storage means provided corresponding to the second predetermined process,
The evacuation execution means is
When the second predetermined process is started from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, the information of the internal storage means is stored in the first predetermined process before the second predetermined process is started. A means for evacuating in the evacuation storage means;
A unit that saves information of the internal storage unit to the second save storage unit in a situation where the second predetermined process is being performed;
Equipped with
The program for executing the second predetermined process is stored in the area of the address group distinguished from the address group of the area in which the program for executing the first predetermined process is stored in the predetermined storage means. Yes,
A first process and a second process are set as the second predetermined process,
When starting the first process from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, the first save storage of the information of the internal storage means in the first predetermined process before starting the first process The data is saved to the means, and the information saved in the first save storage means is returned to the internal storage means when or after the first process is completed.
When starting the first process from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited in the first predetermined process before the first process is started, and the first process is inhibited. When the process is ended and the process is returned to the first predetermined process, the execution of the interrupt process is permitted in the returned first predetermined process, and the execution of the interrupt process is not permitted in the first process. ,
When starting the second process from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, the first save storage of the information of the internal storage means in the first predetermined process before starting the second process The data is saved to the means, and when the second process is finished or after it is finished, the information saved in the first save storage means is returned to the internal storage means.
When starting the second process from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited in the first predetermined process before starting the second process, and the second process is started. When ending the process and returning to the first predetermined process, execution of the interrupt process is permitted in the restored first predetermined process, and execution of the interrupt process is not permitted in the second process. A game machine characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is performed using a gaming medium.

Images